owner’s manual (unlinked) - american honda · pdf file2008 civic sedan owner’s...

2008 Civic Sedan

Owner’s Manual

(Unlinked)

This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web us. This is due to changes in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This manual will be replaced with a hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.© 2007 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. P/N 00X31-SNA-6210

This owner’s manual covers all models ofthe Civic 4-door. You may find descriptionsof equipment and features that are not onyour particular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33SNAC21

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

０７／１０／２６　１４：２５：５１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０００１　

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in theinstrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preservesyour investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind thatyour dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems uniqueto your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2008 Honda Civic was a wise investment.It will give you years of driving pleasure.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Introduction

i

０７／０７／０３　２０：４０：４７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０００２　

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone elseexcept as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It mayalso be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

Introduction

WARNING:

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. Thesedevices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failureof any airbag system component.

ii

０７／０７／０３　２０：４０：５１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０００３　

－

－

－－

－

－

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

on the vehicle.Safety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

Safety Labels

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

０７／０７／０３　２０：４１：０２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０００４　

０７／０７／０３　２０：４１：０４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０００５　

(fluid capacities and tire pressures)

(main controls)

(seat belts, SRS, and child protection)

(indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column)

(heating and cooling, audio, steering wheel, security, and cruise control)

(fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading)

(engine and transmission operation)

(minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)

(flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses)

(warranty and contact information)

(how to order)

(vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls)

Contents

................................................................................................................................................Index . I

..................................................Service Information Summary . last page

...............................................................................................Your Vehicle at a Glance . 3

............................................................Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

..........................................Instruments and Controls . 55

.......................................Features . 107

.......................................................................Before Driving . 179

.........................................................................................Driving . 195

.................................................Maintenance . 221

.........................................Taking Care of the Unexpected . 265

..................Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) . 305

..................................................................................Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) . 309

..............................................Technical Information . 289

IND

EX

1

０７／０７／０３　２０：４１：１４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０００６　

How to operate the heating and airconditioning system, the audiosystem, and other conveniencefeatures.

A convenient reference to thesections in this manual.

A quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.

Explains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator and gauge,and how to use the controls on thedashboard and steering column.

What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,and technical information.

How to order manuals and othertechnical literature.

A summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

A summary of the warrantiescovering your new vehicle, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.

The proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park; pluswhat you need to know if you’replanning to tow a trailer.

This section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience,and details how to handle them.

The maintenance minder shows youwhen you need to take your vehicleto the dealer for maintenance service.There is also a list of things to checkand instructions on how to checkthem.

Important information about theproper use and care of your vehicle’sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints.

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Features

Before Driving

Driving

Technical Information

Warranty and CustomerRelations(U.S. and Canada only)

Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Index

Service Information SummaryTaking Care of the Unexpected

Maintenance

Overview of Contents

2

０７／０７／０３　２０：４１：３０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０００７　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

CONTINUED: If equipped


Your

Vehicle

ataG

lance

3

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

GAUGES

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

TRUNK RELEASEHANDLE

DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS

AUDIO SYSTEM

MOONROOF SWITCH PASSENGER’S FRONT AIRBAG(P. 57)(P. 66)

(P. 9, 24)

(P. 80)

MIRROR CONTROLS

(P. 181)

(P. 9, 30)

(P. 108)

(P. 199)

(P. 112)

Vehicle with navigation system is shown.

DOOR LOCK TAB(P. 79)

ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKET

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION(P. 202)MANUALTRANSMISSION

(P. 102)

(P. 99)

(P. 86)

(P. 106)

(P. 100)

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK SEAT HEATER SWITCHES(P. 172) (P. 98)

０７／０７／０３　２０：４１：３９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０００８　

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊ Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.If equipped

1 :2 :3 :


4

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS(P. 71)(P. 72)

Vehicle with navigation system is shown.(P. 75)

HORN CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR(P. 30)

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON(P. 74)

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER(P. 74)HEATED MIRRORS

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS BUTTONS(P. 73)

DISPLAY CHANGEBUTTON(P. 66)

SEL/RESETBUTTON

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) SYSTEMOFF SWITCH

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

VOICE CONTROLSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE(P. 182)

(P. 66)

(P. 211)

(P. 171)

(P. 176)

(P. 103)

12

2

2

2

3

０７／０７／０３　２０：４１：４６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０００９　

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 11............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 12

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 135. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 146. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 15.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16...Additional Safety Precautions . 17

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 18

..Seat Belt System Components . 18......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 19

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 20Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 21......Airbag System Components . 21

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 24

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 29..How the SRS Indicator Works . 29

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 30

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 30

.............................Airbag Service . 31...Additional Safety Precautions . 32

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 33

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 33

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 34

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 34

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 36

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 36

...Additional Safety Precautions . 37Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 38.......................Protecting Infants . 38

.........Protecting Small Children . 39.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 40....................Installing a Child Seat . 41

...............................With LATCH . 42.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 44

..............................With a Tether . 45...........Protecting Larger Children . 47

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 47..................Using a Booster Seat . 48

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 49

...Additional Safety Precautions . 50.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 51

...................................Safety Labels . 52

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

5

０７／０７／０３　２０：４１：５０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００１０　

－

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat(see pages ).

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

14

33 50

223

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Don’t Drink and Drive

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Restrain All Children

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

6

０７／０７／０３　２０：４２：００　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００１１　

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

(2)

(2)

(8)

(8)

(7)

(9) (9)(3) (1) (4)

(6)

(10)(5)

(11)

(12)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(11) Door Locks(12) Front Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners

０７／０７／０３　２０：４２：０７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００１２　

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.


Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

０７／０７／０３　２０：４２：１８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００１３　

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side impact (see page

for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

27

2924

CONTINUED

Airbags


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

０７／０７／０３　２０：４２：２６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００１４　

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

Remember however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injures ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

What you should do:

Airbags can pose serious hazards.


10

０７／０７／０３　２０：４２：３２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００１５　

－

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked.

Your vehicle has a door-openindicator on the instrument panel toindicate when any door is not tightlyclosed.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

Some models have the auto doorlocking/unlocking feature. For moreinformation, see page .

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the door-open indicator works.

33 37

79

81

61

CONTINUED

Adjust the Front SeatsIntroduction

Close and Lock the Doors1.

2.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

０７／０７／０３　２０：４２：４３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００１６　

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down, and inand out (see page ).75

91

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.


12

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

０７／０７／０３　２０：４２：５１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００１７　

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe center of the back of your headrests against the center of therestraint.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints and how the driver’sand front passenger’s active headrestraints work.Have passengers adjust their head

restraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.

91

92


Adjust the Head Restraints4.D

riverand

Passenger

Safety

13

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

０７／０７／０３　２０：４２：５９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００１８　

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.This spreads the forces of a crash

over the strongest bones in yourupper body.


Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

14

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

０７／０７／０３　２０：４３：０５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００１９　

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and head restraints, andput on their seat belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to situpright, well back in their seats, withtheir feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, press and hold the releasebutton and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

18

CONTINUED


Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

０７／０７／０３　２０：４３：１４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００２０　

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

Advice for Pregnant Women


16

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

０７／０７／０３　２０：４３：２１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００２１　

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Additional Safety Precautions


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

０７／０７／０３　２０：４３：２７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００２２　

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver’s seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position before yourseat belt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened before

the beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

This system uses the same sensorsas the front airbags to monitorwhether the front seat belts arelatched or unlatched, and how muchweight is on the front passenger’sseat (see pages and ).

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

26 27

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components

18

０７／０７／０３　２０：４３：３７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００２３　

CONTINUED

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in position.

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to help

restrain your body.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten theseat belt, pull it out only as far asneeded.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy.

14


Automatic Seat Belt TensionersLap/Shoulder BeltD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

19

０７／１０／２６　１４：２６：０３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００２４　

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

If a side curtain airbag deploysduring a side impact, the tensioneron that side of the vehicle will alsodeploy.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

Honda provides a limited warrantyon seat belts. See your

booklet fordetails.

250

do not deploy

HondaWarranty Information


Seat Belt Maintenance

20

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

０７／０７／０３　２０：４３：５５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００２５　

CONTINUED

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21

(9)(8) (1) (2)

(3)

(5)

(4)

(13) (10)

(14)(5)

(4)

(6)

(10)

(12) (11)

(7)(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit(13) Seat Belt Buckle Tensioners(14) Rear Safing Sensor

(1) Driver’s Front Airbag(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors

０７／０７／０３　２０：４４：０１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００２６　

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

Your airbag system includes:

24

27

29


22

(16)

(15)

(15)

(15) Side Impact Sensor (Second)(16) Side Curtain Airbags

０７／０７／０３　２０：４４：０６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００２７　

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

Sensors that can detect whethera child is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal thecontrol unit to turn the airbagoff (see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. If the weight is about 65lbs (29 kg) or less (the weightof an infant or small child), thepassenger’s front airbag will beturned off (see page ).

Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver’s seat belt and thefront passenger’s seat belt arelatched or unlatched (see page

).An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

19

28

26

29

30

30

18

26


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

23

０７／０７／０３　２０：４４：１５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００２８　

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Only the driver’s airbag will deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).26

How Your Front Airbags Work


24

０７／０７／０３　２０：４４：２３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００２９　

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whethersensors detect the occupant iswearing a seat belt or not.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

CONTINUED

Dual-Threshold AirbagsDual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

not latched

latched


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

０７／０７／０３　２０：４４：３１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００３０　

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Hondadoes not encourage carrying aninfant or small child in front, if thesensors detect the weight of aninfant or small child (up to about 65lbs or 29 kg), the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any objects or metal itemsunder the front seats.

Advanced Airbags


26

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSORS

０７／０７／０３　２０：４４：４０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００３１　

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

Moving the front seat or seat-backforcibly back against the foldedrear seat.

Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger’s seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag will be off. However, thepassenger airbag off indicator willnot come on.

When the airbag is turned off, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page ).

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

If your vehicle is equipped with thefloor mats, make sure the floor matbehind the front passenger’s seat ishooked to the floor mat anchor (seepage ). If it is not, the mat mayinterfere with the proper operationof the sensors and operation of theseat.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid acceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

30

250

CONTINUED

How Your Side Airbags Work


do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

27

０７／１０／２６　１４：２６：１５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００３２　

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if positionsensors detect a child has leaned intothe side airbag’s deployment path,the airbag will shut off.

30Side Airbag Cutoff System


28

０７／０７／０３　２０：４４：５８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００３３　

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:In a moderate to severe side impact,

sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on for several seconds thengoes off. This tells you the system isworking properly.

The SRS indicator alerts you to apotential problem with your airbagsor seat belt tensioners.

CONTINUED

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS IndicatorWorks


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

０７／０７／０３　２０：４５：０８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００３４　

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger’s seat.It does there is a problemwith the airbag.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them. This indicator alerts you that the

passenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on for several secondsand then go off (see page ). If itdoesn’t come on, stays on, or comeson while driving without a passengerin the front seat, have the systemchecked.

60

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the SideAirbag OffIndicator Works


not mean

not

30

Canada

U.S.

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

U.S. Canada

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

０７／０７／０３　２０：４５：１６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００３５　

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.

If no weight is detected on the frontseat, the airbag will be automaticallyshut off. However, the indicator willnot come on.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly ifthe total weight on the seat is nearthe airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as farto the rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.

Any items under the frontpassenger’s seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

CONTINUED


The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

An airbag ever inflates.

Airbag ServiceD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

31

０７／０７／０３　２０：４５：２６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００３６　

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

If water oranother liquid soaks into a seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts worn during a crash tomake sure they are operatingproperly.


Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

Do not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.


32

０７／０７／０３　２０：４５：３２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００３７　

－－

－

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

38 4647 50

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

０７／０７／０３　２０：４５：４１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００３８　

－

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off (see page ),please follow these guidelines:

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat. Somestates have laws restricting wherechildren may ride.

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

26

47

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.Infants

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks


34

０７／０７／０３　２０：４５：５０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００３９　

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

Canadian Models

U.S. Models


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

Dashboard

Sun Visor

Sun Visor

０７／０７／０３　２０：４６：０３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００４０　

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

47

91

15

14

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention


36

０７／０７／０３　２０：４６：１２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００４１　

－

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.


Childrenwho play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (see page ).

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

If a child wraps a loose

seat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages and for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

This can preventchildren from accidentally fallingout (see page ).

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the trunk, whichcan lead to accidental injury ordeath.

8087

44 45


Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Lock all doors and the trunk whenyour vehicle is not in use.Never hold an infant or child on

your lap.

Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Use the childproof door locks toprevent children from opening therear doors.

Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

０７／０７／０３　２０：４６：２０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００４２　

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

It could also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small Children

38

０７／０７／０３　２０：４６：２８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００４３　

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

Even with advanced front airbagsthat automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

26

CONTINUED

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

０７／０７／０３　２０：４６：３８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００４４　

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerseating positions in the back seat.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Selecting a Child Seat

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

1.

40

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

０７／０７／０３　２０：４６：４５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００４５　

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

2.

3.1.

2.

3.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

０７／０７／０３　２０：４６：５５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００４６　

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at the outer rear seats.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat UsingLATCH


42

LOWER ANCHORS Rigid type

BUTTON

０７／０７／０３　２０：４７：０３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００４７　

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint and over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

If the tether strap is too long andcannot be tightened firmly, find aroute where the strap can betightened securely.

Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connector asshown above.

6.

5.

4.

7.

93


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

TETHER STRAPHOOK

Flexible type

ANCHOR

０７／０７／０３　２０：４７：１１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００４８　

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

1. 2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt


44

０７／０７／０３　２０：４７：１８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００４９　

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using one of theanchorage points shown above.

4. 5.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with aTether


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

COVER

ANCHORAGE POINTS

ANCHOR

０７／０７／０３　２０：４７：２７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００５０　

If the tether strap is too long andcannot be tightened firmly, find aroute where the strap can betightened securely.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

Lift the anchor cover, then attachthe tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

1. 2.

3.

44


46

ANCHORANCHOR

Outer Position

TETHERSTRAPHOOK

Center Position

TETHERSTRAPHOOK

０７／０７／０３　２０：４７：３３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００５１　

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger Children

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

０７／０７／０３　２０：４７：４０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００５２　

A child who has outgrown a forward-facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states and Canadian provincesalso require children to use a boosterseat until they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intend

to drive.Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible, and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

3.

4.

5.40

Using a Booster Seat


48

０７／０７／０３　２０：４７：４９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００５３　

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

14 47

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Physical Size

Maturity


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

０７／０７／０３　２０：４８：００　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００５４　

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.


50

０７／０７／０３　２０：４８：０５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００５５　

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

With the trunk open, airflow can pullexhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk open, open all the windows,and set the heating and coolingsystem as shown below.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

51

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

０７／０７／０３　２０：４８：１３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００５６　

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury or death. Read these labelscarefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label, which is removedby the owner), contact your dealerfor a replacement.

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

52

DASHBOARD SUN VISOR

RADIATOR CAP

０７／０７／０３　２０：４８：２８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００５７　

U.S. modelsU.S. models

Canadian models

Canadian models

Safety Labels

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

53

HOOD DOORJAMBS

０７／０７／０３　２０：４８：４７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００５８　

54

０７／０７／０３　２０：４８：４９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００５９　

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 56............................Instrument Panel . 57

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 59.............................................Gauges . 66

.....................................Odometer . 66..............Display Change Button . 66

...................................Trip Meter . 67..................................Fuel Gauge . 67

...................Temperature Gauge . 67Outside Temperature

...................................Indicator . 68..........Check Fuel Cap Message . 68

..................Maintenance Minder . 69Controls Near the Steering

...........................................Wheel . 70.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 71

.........Turn Signals and Headlights . 72............Daytime Running Lights . 73

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 73.................Hazard Warning Button . 74.................Rear Window Defogger . 74

..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 75...............................Keys and Locks . 76

........................Immobilizer System . 77................................Ignition Switch . 78

......................................Door Locks . 79......................Power Door Locks . 80

..............Childproof Door Locks . 80.Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 81

.....................Auto Door Locking . 81.................Auto Door Unlocking . 83

................................................Trunk . 86........Emergency Trunk Opener . 87

.......................Remote Transmitter . 88.................................................Seats . 91

....................................Seat Heaters . 98..............................Power Windows . 99

.......................................Moonroof . 100...........................................Mirrors . 102

...............................Parking Brake . 103

...............................Interior Lights . 104.........Interior Convenience Items . 105

.....................Beverage Holders . 106.........Accessory Power Socket . 106

..................................Glove Box . 106.............Console Compartment . 106

Instruments and Controls

Instruments

andC

ontrols

55

０７／０７／０３　２０：４８：５３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００６０　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊ If equipped:

Control Locations

56

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

AUDIO SYSTEM

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

MOONROOF SWITCHINSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS

ACCESSORYPOWERSOCKET

DOOR LOCK TAB

GAUGES(P. 57)

(P. 66)

(P. 80)(P. 79)

MIRROR CONTROLS(P. 108)

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE(P. 181)TRUNK RELEASEHANDLE

Vehicle with navigation system is shown.

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION(P. 202)MANUALTRANSMISSION(P. 199)

(P. 112)(P. 100)

(P. 102)

(P. 99)

(P. 86)

(P. 106)

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES(P. 98)

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK(P. 172)

０７／０７／０３　２０：４９：００　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００６１　

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for Canadian models are noted in the text.Canadian DX-G model with M/T has the electric power steering (EPS) indicator (see page 62) next to the immobilizer system indicator.

Instrument Panel

Instruments

andC

ontrolsDX, DX-G (Canada), LX, EX, EX-L

57

LOW FUELINDICATOR

(P. 63)

(P. 64)

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

CRUISE MAININDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR(P. 65)

(P. 64)

(P. 64)

(P. 60)

CHARGINGSYSTEMINDICATOR

(P. 65, 277)

(P. 65, 277)

(P. 59)

(P. 61)

DAYTIMERUNNINGLIGHTSINDICATOR

TRUNK-OPENINDICATOR (P. 61)

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

DOOR-OPENINDICATOR (P. 61)

SIDE AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR(P. 60)

LIGHTS ONINDICATOR(P. 61)

HIGH BEAMINDICATOR(P. 61)

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR (P. 60)

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (P. 65, 278) MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR (P. 65, 223)

(P. 63)

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKESYSTEM (ABS)INDICATOR (P. 60)

(P. 59)

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR

TIRE PRESSUREMONITORING SYSTEM(TPMS) INDICATOR

０７／１０／２６　１４：２７：０６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００６２　

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument Panel

Si

58

LOW FUELINDICATOR(P. 64)

MAINTENANCE MINDERINDICATOR

(P. 62)

(P. 61)

(P. 62)

(P. 64)CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

(P. 60)MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR

CRUISE MAININDICATOR (P. 64)

LIGHTS ONINDICATOR

HIGH BEAMINDICATOR(P. 61) (P. 60)

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

(P. 60)

TRUNK-OPEN INDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

DAYTIME RUNNINGLIGHTS INDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING(EPS) INDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P. 62)

(P. 65, 277)

(P. 65, 277) (P. 65, 278)

(P. 65, 223)

(P. 61)

(P. 61)

(P. 63)

(P. 63)(P. 60) (P. 61)

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 65) REV LIMIT INDICATOR (P. 64)

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

DOOR-OPEN INDICATOR

(P. 59)

SIDE AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR (P. 59)

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS) INDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR

０７／０７／０５　０９：１５：１６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００６３　

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

This indicator reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belt, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belt before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

1.

2.

18279

Parking Brakeand BrakeSystemIndicator

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

Instruments

andC

ontrols

59

U.S. Canada

０７／０７／０３　２０：４９：２６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００６４　

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but noanti-lock function. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on for severalseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This indicator willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,side curtain airbags, automatic seatbelt tensioners, driver’s seat positionsensor, or the front passenger’sweight sensors. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blink,and the engine’s fuel system will bedisabled (see page ).

This indicator comes on for severalseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For more information, see page . 77

29

208

30

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Side Airbag OffIndicator


60

U.S. Canada

０７／０７／０３　２０：４９：３５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００６５　

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

If this indicator comes on when theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position and the parking brake isreleased, it means there is a problemin the circuit. Have your vehiclechecked by your dealer.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator also comes on withreduced brightness when thedaytime running lights (DRL) are on(see page ).

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will remain on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door and remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

This indicator comes on if the trunklid is not closed tightly.

This indicator comes on if any dooris not closed tightly.

247246

72

73

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Lights On Indicator‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Trunk-open Indicator

Door-open Indicator


Instruments

andC

ontrols

61

０７／０７／０３　２０：４９：４６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００６６　

If equipped If equippedThis indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or if it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have itchecked. Without VSA, your vehiclestill has normal driving ability, butwill not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. See page

for more information on theVSA system.

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. See page for moreinformation on the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position and goes offafter the engine starts. If it comes onat any other time, there is a problemin the electric power steering system.If this happens, stop the vehicle in asafe place, and turn off the engine.Reset the system by restarting theengine. The indicator will not turnoff immediately. If it does not go offafter driving a short distance, orcomes back on again while driving,take the vehicle to your dealer tohave it checked. With the indicatoron, the EPS may be off, making thevehicle harder to steer.

1.

2.

3.

210

210

210


Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator Electric Power Steering(EPS) Indicator

Si and Canadian DX-G with manualtransmission models

62

０７／１０／２６　１４：１０：１２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００６７　

If you turn the steering wheel to thefull left or right position repeatedlywhile stopping or driving at very lowspeed, you may feel slightly hardersteering due to overheating of thesteering gear box.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or if it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thereis a problem with the TPMS. Withthis indicator on, the low tirepressure indicator will not come onwhen a tire loses pressure. Take thevehicle to your dealer to have thesystem checked.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are significantly lowon pressure.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service(see page ). For moreinformation, see page .

267

286212

U.S. models onlyU.S. models only


Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

０７／０７／０３　２０：５０：０６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００６８　

If equipped

If equipped

Canadian models only

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button (seepage ).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicatorcome on (see page ).

To protect the engine from damage,never drive with the tachometer inits red zone.

This indicator shows you when theengine speed is near the tachometer’sred zone. When the engine speedgets to near the red zone, theindicator blinks. If you exceed themaximum speed for the gear you arein, the indicator stays on, and youmay feel the engine cut in and outdue to the engine speed limiter (seepage ).

This indicator is in the fuel gauge. Itcomes on as a reminder that youmust refuel soon. When the indicatorcomes on, there is about 0.9 US gal(3.5 ) of fuel remaining in the tankbefore the reading reaches E. Thereis a small reserve of fuel remainingin the tank when the reading doesreach E.

201239

176

176


Low Fuel IndicatorCruise Main Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

Rev Limit Indicator

Si model only

64

LOW FUEL INDICATORREV LIMIT INDICATOR

０７／０７／０５　１６：４１：１１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００６９　

See page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. See page

for more information on thesecurity system.

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in forscheduled maintenance. Themaintenance main items and subitems will be displayed in theinformation display. See page formore information on themaintenance minder.

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

278

277

277

223

175

If equipped


Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Security System IndicatorMaintenance MinderIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

SiExcept Si

０７／０７／０３　２０：５０：３０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００７０　

To switch the information displaybetween the odometer, trip meter,outside temperature (if equipped),and engine oil life and maintenanceitem code(s), press the SEL/RESETbutton repeatedly.

Press and hold until the speedometer,trip meter, and odometer readingsswitch between miles per hour andkilometers per hour. A beeper willsound.

This shows the total distance yourvehicle has been driven. It measuresmiles or kilometers.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

Odometer

Display Change Button

Gauges

66

TEMPERATURE GAUGE

TRIP METER

SPEEDOMETER

FUELGAUGE

SEL/RESET BUTTON DISPLAY CHANGE BUTTON

INFORMATIONDISPLAY

TACHOMETER

ODOMETER/OUTSIDETEMPERATURE INDICATOR

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS CONTROL BUTTONS

U.S. model with A/T is shown

０７／０７／０３　２０：５０：３８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００７１　

Each trip meter works independently,so you can keep track of twodifferent distances.

There are two trip meters: TRIP Aand TRIP B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the SEL/RESET button repeatedly.

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0.’’

This meter shows the number ofmiles or kilometers driven since youlast reset it.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the reading should rise toabout the middle of the gauge. Insevere driving conditions, such asvery hot weather or a long period ofuphill driving, the reading may riseinto the upper half of the gauge. If itreaches the red (Hot) mark, pullsafely to the side of the road. Seepage for instructions andprecautions on checking the enginecooling system.

275

Trip Meter Fuel Gauge Temperature Gauge

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

０７／０７／０３　２０：５０：４６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００７２　

± ±

－－－－－－－－

If equipped

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).

The sensor delays the display updateuntil it reaches the correct outsidetemperature. This may take severalminutes.

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F ( 3°C) warmer orcooler.

NOTE: The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Centigrade (Canadianmodels). To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theSEL/RESET button until thetemperature is shown on theinformation display. Select the outside temperature

display, then press and hold theSEL/RESET button for 10 seconds.The following sequence will appearfor 1 second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5,

4, 3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2,3, 3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).

When it reaches the desired value,release the SEL/RESET button. Youshould see the new outsidetemperature displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

Your vehicle’s onboard diagnosticsystem will detect a loose or missingfuel fill cap as an evaporative systemleak. The first time a leak is detecteda ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the information display.Turn the engine off, and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenit, then retighten it until it clicks atleast once. The message should gooff after several days of normaldriving once you tighten or replacethe fuel fill cap. To scroll to anotherdisplay, press the SEL/RESETbutton. The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’message will appear each time yourestart the engine until the systemturns the message off.

Outside Temperature Indicator Check Fuel Cap Message

Gauges

68

０７／０７／０３　２０：５０：５５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００７３　

The information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

If the system still detects a leak inyour vehicle’s evaporative emissionssystem, the malfunction indicatorlamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fillcap was not already tightened, turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL shouldgo off after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If the MIL does not go off,have your vehicle inspected by adealer. For more information, seepage .278

223

Maintenance Minder

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

０７／０７／０３　２０：５１：００　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００７４　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊ Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.If equipped

1 :2 :3 :

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

70

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

SEL/RESET BUTTON

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS

DISPLAY CHANGE BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

(P. 73)

(P. 66)

(P. 66)

(P. 74)

(P. 74)

(P. 30)

(P. 72) (P. 71)

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

HORN

(P. 75)Vehicle with navigation system is shown.

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE(P. 182)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST(VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS

VOICE CONTROL SWITCHES

HEATED MIRRORS

(P. 211)

(P. 171)

(P. 103)

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS(P. 176)

1

2

2

3

2

2

０７／０７／０３　２０：５１：０６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００７５　

－－－

－

－

－

－

－

－＊

＊

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

While the vehicle is stopped and ingear, the wipers sweep thewindshield whenever you removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

The wipers operate everyfew seconds. At low speed andhigh speed, the wipers runcontinuously.

The length of the wiper interval isvaried automatically according tothe vehicle’s speed.

Vary the delay by turning theadjustment ring. If you turn it tothe shortest delay( position), the wiperschange to low speed operationwhen the vehicle speed exceeds 12mph (20km/h).

Pull thewiper control lever toward you,and hold it. The washers sprayuntil you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed, thencomplete one more sweep afteryou release the lever.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

On EX, EX-L, Si, and Canadian LXmodels

OFF

MIST

LO

HI

INT

Windshield Washer

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

ADJUSTMENT RING

: EX, EX-L, Si, and Canadian LX

０７／０７／０３　２０：５１：１５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００７６　

－－

－

Turn SignalOFFParking and interior lightsHeadlights onHigh BeamsFlash high beams

When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, thelights on indicator comes on as areminder.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights. Ifyou leave the lights on with the keyremoved from the ignition switch,you will hear a reminder chime whenyou open the driver’s door.

Push down on thelever to signal a left turn and up tosignal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever,and hold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Push the leverforward until you hear a click. Thehigh beam indicator will come on(see page ). Pull the lever back toreturn to the low beams.

Turning theswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-markerlights, and rear license plate lights.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

61

Turn Signals and Headlights

Turn Signal High Beams

Headlights On

72

０７／０７／０３　２０：５１：２３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００７７　

＋－

The buttons under the left side ventcontrol the brightness of theinstrument panel. Push the orbutton to adjust the brightness.

Separate adjustments can be madewhen the headlights are on and off.

With the headlight switch off orposition, the high beam

headlights come on with reducedbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

There are six brightness levels.When you push either button, theinformation display indicates thecurrent level. You will hear a tone

when you reach the maximum orminimum brightness. The displayreturns to the odometer 5 secondsafter you stop adjusting thebrightness.

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to the

or position.

The center of each meter (upper andlower) illuminates with reducedbrightness when you unlock andopen the driver’s door, and then goesback to the selected brightness whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position.

If you insert the key but do not turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, the illumination turns off inabout 10 seconds.

Daytime Running Lights Instrument Panel Brightness

Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness

Instruments

andC

ontrols

73

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESSCONTROL BUTTONS

０７／０７／０３　２０：５１：３１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００７８　

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe side-to-side.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicator inthe button comes on to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignitionswitch. You have to turn thedefogger on again when you restartthe vehicle.

Push the button to turn on thehazard warning lights (four-wayflashers). This causes all fouroutside turn signals and both turnindicators in the instrument panel toflash. Use the hazard warning lightsif you need to park in a dangerousarea near heavy traffic, or if yourvehicle is disabled.

Pushing this button also turns themirror heaters on or off. For moreinformation, see page .103

On All EX-L, Canadian LX, EX, and Simodels

Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger

Rear Window DefoggerHazard Warning Button

74

EX-L,CanadianLX, EX,and Si

０７／０７／０４　１７：４２：００　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００７９　

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in position.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out, so it pointstoward your chest, not towardyour face. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andindicators.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

1.

4.

2.

3.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

０７／０７／０３　２０：５１：４５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００８０　

You should have received a keynumber tag with your set of keys.You will need this key number if youever have to get a key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

The valet key works only in theignition and the door locks. You cankeep the trunk and trunk releasehandle locked when you leave yourvehicle and the valet key at a parkingfacility.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle.

Keys and Locks

76

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTER KEYWITH REMOTETRANSMITTER

VALETKEY(Gray)

KEYNUMBERTAG

VALETKEY(Gray)

MASTERKEY(Black)

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTER KEYWITH REMOTETRANSMITTER

VALETKEY(Gray)

U.S. LX and Canadian DX-G models DX modelEX, EX-L, Si, and Canadian LX models

０７／０７／０３　２０：５１：５２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００８１　

CONTINUED

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undrivable.

If you have lost your key and cannotstart your engine, contact yourdealer.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come onbriefly, then go off. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position, remove the key,reinsert it, and turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position again.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

The keys without a remotetransmitter do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Keys and Locks, Immobilizer System

Immobilizer SystemInstrum

entsand

Controls

77

Always take the ignition key with youwhenever you leave the vehicle alone.

０７／０７／０３　２０：５２：０２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００８２　

－

－

－－

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, push it in slightly. Ifyour vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever mustalso be in park.

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System, Ignition Switch

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

Ignition Switch

LOCK (0)

78

０７／０７／０３　２０：５２：１１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００８３　

Each door has a lock tab next to theinside door handle. Pull the tab outto lock the door, and push it in tounlock the door.

To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, pull thelock tab out, and close the door. Tolock the driver’s door, pull and holdthe outside door handle, then pullthe lock tab out. Release the handle,then close the door.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the LOCK (0) orthe ACCESSORY (I) position andopen the driver’s door. Remove thekey to turn off the beeper.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.

On DX models

Ignition Switch, Door Locks

Door LocksInstrum

entsand

Controls

79

LOCK TAB

To lock

To unlock

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control of thevehicle.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

０７／０７／０３　２０：５２：１７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００８４　

To lock the passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, pull outthe lock tab and close the door. Tolock the driver’s door, remove thekey from the ignition switch and pullout the lock tab or push the top ofthe master switch, then close thedoor.

The lock tab on the passenger’s doorlocks and unlocks only that door.Pushing in the driver’s door lock tabonly unlocks the driver’s door.

To lock the doors, push the top ofthe master door lock switch oneither front door, pull out the locktab on the driver’s door, or use thekey in the outside lock on the driver’sdoor.

To unlock only the driver’s doorfrom the outside, turn the key andrelease it. If you turn it again, alldoors unlock.

With any door open and the key inthe ignition, both master door lockswitches are disabled. They are notdisabled when all the doors areclosed, or when the key is not in theignition.

Pushing the bottom of either masterdoor lock switch unlocks all doors.

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, push the locktab in, and use the outside doorhandle.

On all models except DX

Door Locks

Lockout Prevention

Power Door Locks Childproof Door Locks

80

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

To lock

To unlock

LEVER

Lock

Unlock

０７／０７／０３　２０：５２：２７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００８５　

CONTINUED

The auto door locking feature hasthree possible settings:

The doors lock when the vehiclespeed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h).

The doors lock whenever youmove the shift lever out of thePark (P) position (A/T vehicles).

The auto door locking isdeactivated all the time.

This is the default setting.Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position (A/T vehicles).

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver’sdoor.

Your vehicle has customizablesettings for the doors toautomatically lock and unlock. Thereare default settings for each of thesefeatures. You can turn off or changethe settings for these features asdescribed on the following pages.

When you customize the setting,make sure your vehicle is parkedsafely, the engine is off, and applythe parking brake. Make all settingsbefore you start driving. 1.

2.


Door Locks

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Auto Door Locking To turn off the Auto Door Lockmodes:

Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

０７／０７／０３　２０：５２：３７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００８６　

Locks all doors when the shift lever ismoved out of the Park (P) position (A/Tvehicles only).

Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and make sure toclose the driver’s door.

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).

Release the switch, and within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the LOCK (0) position.

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door until you hear a click(after about 5 seconds).


1.

2.

3.

4.

3.

4.

Door Locks

To program the Park Lock mode:

82

０７／０７／０３　２０：５２：４５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００８７　

CONTINUED

The auto door unlocking feature hasfive possible settings:

Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position (A/T vehicles).


All doors unlock when you movethe shift lever to the Park (P)position (A/T vehicles).

This is the default setting.

the driver’s doorunlocks when you move the shiftlever to the Park (P) position.

The auto door unlocking isdeactivated all the time.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.

Release the switch, and within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY (I) position.

move the shiftlever to the Park (P) position.

Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).

push and hold thebrake pedal, and move the shiftlever out of the Park (P) position.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Locks all doors when the vehicle’s speedreaches about 9 mph (15 km/h).

On A/T vehicles,

On A/T vehicles,

On A/T vehicles,

Door Locks

To program the Drive Lock mode: Auto Door UnlockingInstrum

entsand

Controls

83

A/T models

０７／０７／０３　２０：５２：５６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００８８　

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click,and after about 5 seconds, you willhear another click.


Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position (A/T vehicles).

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver’sdoor.

All doors unlock whenever youturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position.

The driver’s door unlockswhenever you turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I)position.This is the default setting on M/Tvehicles.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Door Locks

To turn off the Auto Door Unlockmodes:

84

０７／１０／２６　１４：１０：２２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００８９　

CONTINUED

Unlocks the driver’s door or all doorswhen the ignition switch is moved out ofthe ON (II) position.

driver’s door unlockfeature.

all doors unlock feature.

Unlocks the driver’s door or all doorswhen the shift lever is moved into thePark (P) position (A/T vehicles only).



Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold the switch:

Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate

Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate


Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position. Make sure the shift lever is in the

Park (P) position (A/T vehicles).1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Door Locks

To program the Ignition SwitchUnlock mode:

To program the Park Unlock mode:Instrum

entsand

Controls

85

A/T models

０７／１０／２６　１４：１０：３５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００９０　

Even though your vehicle’s battery isremoved or goes dead, the systemkeeps the auto door lock/unlocksetting which you selected.

push and hold thebrake pedal, then move the shiftlever out of the Park (P) position.

Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver’s door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold the switch:

Release the switch, and within 5seconds, turn the ignition switchto the ACCESSORY (I) position.

move the shiftlever to the Park (P) position.

Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate

Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.

To open the trunk, pull the trunkrelease handle on the left side of thedriver’s seat. To protect items in thetrunk when you need to give the keyto someone else, lock the trunkrelease handle with the master key,and give the other person the valetkey.

3.

4.

5.

6.

On A/T vehicles,

On A/T vehicles,

driver’s door unlockfeature,

all doors unlock feature.

Door Locks, Trunk

Trunk

86

MASTER KEY

TRUNK RELEASEHANDLE

PULL

０７／０７／０３　２０：５３：２４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００９１　

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature.

As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from inside.To open the trunk, push the releaselever in the direction pointed by anarrow.

For more information about childsafety, see page .

Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote transmitter.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging it,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

, page .

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

You can also use the master key toopen the trunk.

3751


Emergency Trunk Opener

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Trunk

Instruments

andC

ontrols

87

RELEASE LEVERMASTER KEY

０７／１０／２６　１４：１０：４５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００９２　

－

－－

－

Press this button once tolock all doors. Some exterior lightswill flash once. When you pushLOCK twice within 5 seconds, youwill hear a horn to verify that thedoors are locked. You cannot lockthe doors if any door is not fullyclosed or the key is in the ignitionswitch.

Press this button forabout 1 second to attract attention;the horn will sound, and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or insert the key.

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the door activatedposition) will come on when youpress the UNLOCK button. If you donot open any door, the light stays onfor about 30 seconds, then fades out.If you relock the doors with theremote transmitter before 30seconds have elapsed, the light goesoff immediately.

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the other doors.Some exterior lights will flash twiceeach time you press the button. Thisbutton does not work when the keyis in the ignition switch.

If you push the LOCK button twicewithin 5 seconds, you will hear ahorn to verify that the securitysystem has set.

Press thisbutton for about 1 second to openthe trunk. You cannot open the trunkif the key is in the ignition switch.

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany of the doors within 30 seconds,the doors automatically relock. OnU.S. LX, EX, EX-L, and Si models,the security system will also set.


On U.S. LX, EX, EX-L, and Si models

LOCK

PANICUNLOCK

TRUNK RELEASE

Remote Transmitter

88

LOCKBUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

PANIC BUTTON

PANIC BUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

EX, EX-L, Si, and Canadian LX models

UNLOCK BUTTON

U.S. LX and Canadian DX-G models

０７／０７／０３　２０：５３：４１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００９３　

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.

Battery type: CR1616

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Replacing the Transmitter BatteryRemote Transmitter Care

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

SCREW

０７／０７／０３　２０：５３：５１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００９４　

＋

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing down), theninsert it into the back of the cover.

An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment.Always confirm local regulationsfor battery disposal.

Install the parts in reverse order.3.

4.

5.




Remote Transmitter

90

TAB

BATTERY

０７／０７／０３　２０：５３：５８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００９５　

－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

11 13

Make all adjustments before youstart driving.

To adjust the seat forward orbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

To change the seat-back angle, pullup on the lever on the outside of theseat bottom.

Front Seat Adjustments

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

91

０７／０７／０３　２０：５４：０５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００９６　

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning aboutimproperly positioning head restraints.

13

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push the lever downrepeatedly.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the center of the backof the occupant’s head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment Head Restraints

Seats

92

０７／０７／０３　２０：５４：１２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００９７　

CONTINUED

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release button,then pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

When reinstalling a head restraint,put the legs back in place. Thenadjust it to the appropriate heightwhile pressing the release button.

Make sure the head restraint locksin position when you reinstall it.

When a passenger is seated in therear center seating position, thecenter head restraint should beadjusted up or down, to match thepassenger’s height.

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust arestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

Seats

Removing the Head Restraint

Adjusting the Head Restraint

Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

Rear Center PositionFront

RELEASE BUTTONSEAT-BACK

CUSHION

LEGS RELEASE BUTTON

SEAT-BACK

CUSHIONLEG

Failure to reinstall the headrestraints can result in severeinjury during a crash.

Always replace the headrestraints before driving.

０７／０７／０３　２０：５４：２１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００９８　

The driver’s and front passenger’sseats have active head restraints. Ifthe vehicle is struck severely fromthe rear, the occupant properlysecured with the seat belt will bepushed against the seat-back and thehead restraint will automaticallymove forward.

This reduces the distance betweenthe restraint and the occupant’s head.It also helps protect the occupants

against whiplash and injuries to theneck and upper spine.

After a collision, the activatedrestraint should return to its normalposition.

If the restraints do not return to theirnormal position, or in the event of asevere collision, have the vehicleinspected by a Honda dealer.

For a head restraint system to workproperly:

Do not hang any items on the headrestraints, or from the restraintlegs.

Do not place any object betweenan occupant and the seat-back.

Install each restraint in its properlocation.

Only use genuine Hondareplacement head restraints.

Seats

Active Head Restraints

94

０７／０７／０３　２０：５４：２９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　００９９　

The back of the rear seat folds down,giving you direct access to the trunk.The seat-back is released from insidethe trunk.

On EX, EX-L, Si, and Canadian LXmodels, the rear seat armrest is inthe center of the rear seat. Pivot itdown to use it.

The seat-back can be folded down asone piece.

To use the console lid as an armrest,slide it to one of its three positions.

CONTINUED


On DX, U.S. LX, and Canadian DX-Gmodels

Folding Rear SeatArmrest

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

０７／０７／０３　２０：５４：３７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１００　

When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe guide.

To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the trunk panel. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.

To release the seat-back, pull therelease under the trunk panel. Pushthe seat-back down, then let go ofthe release.

The left and right seat-backs can befolded separately from inside thetrunk.


Seats

96

GUIDE

CENTER SHOULDER BELTPull RELEASE

０７／０７／０３　２０：５４：４３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１０１　

Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are secured.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See on page

.

Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See onpage .

Make sure that the folded seat-backdoes not press against the frontpassenger’s seat, as this could causethe weight sensors to workimproperly.

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back, and the center shoulder belt isre-positioned in the guide wheneverthe seat-back is in its upright position.Be sure there are no twists in anyshoulder belt.

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded down.

51

191Carrying Cargo

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

97

０７／０７／０３　２０：５４：４８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１０２　

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters, even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

In the LO setting, the heater runscontinuously. It does not cycle withtemperature changes.

In the HI setting, the heater turns offwhen the seat gets warm, and turnsback on after the seat’s temperaturedrops.

The ignition switch must be in theON (II) position to use seat heaters.Push the top of the switch, HI, torapidly heat up the seat. After theseat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe bottom of the switch. This willkeep the seat warm.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The passenger seat isonly heated in the seat bottombecause of the side airbag cutoffsystem.

On EX-L model

Seat Heaters

98

Passenger’s Seat

Driver’s Seat SEAT HEATER SWITCHESHEATERS

０７／０７／０３　２０：５４：５６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１０３　

－

－If the MAIN switch is OFF, thepassenger windows cannot be raisedor lowered. Keep the MAIN switchoff when you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

To open or close thedriver’s window, push or pull thewindow switch firmly down or up tothe second detent, and release it.The window will automatically godown or up all the way. To stop thewindow, pull or push the windowswitch briefly.

If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction, and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anywindow. To open a window, push theswitch down and hold it. Release theswitch when you want the window tostop. Pull back on the switch andhold it to close the window.

The windows will operate for up to10 minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

CONTINUED

Except DX and Canadian DX-G

Except DX and Canadian DX-G

Power Windows

AUTO

AUTO REVERSE

Instruments

andC

ontrols

99

DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

０７／０７／０３　２０：５５：０４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１０４　

If equippedTurn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position before operating themoonroof switch on the ceilingconsole.

To open the moonroof fully, pullback the moonroof switch firmly.The moonroof opens all the way. Tostop the moonroof from openingfully, briefly move the switch ineither direction.

To tilt the moonroof, push the centerof the moonroof switch straight up.To stop the moonroof from tiltingfully open, push the moonroof switchforward.

To open or close the moonroofpartially, pull or push the moonroofswitch lightly to the first detent andhold it. The moonroof will stop whenyou release the switch.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function will be disabled. Toreset the AUTO function afterreconnecting the battery or installingthe fuse, do this:

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor about 2 seconds.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

1.

2.

Moonroof

Power Windows, Moonroof

100

MOONROOF SWITCH

TiltClose

Open

０７／０７／０３　２０：５５：１３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１０５　

To close the moonroof fully, pushthe moonroof switch forward to thesecond detent, then release it. Themoonroof closes all the way. To stopthe moonroof from closing all theway, briefly move the switch ineither direction.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch. Thekey-off delay cancels as soon as youopen either front door. You mustthen turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position for the moonroof tooperate.

If the moonroof runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close themoonroof, remove the obstacle, thenuse the moonroof switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when themoonroof is almost closed. Youshould always check that allpassengers and objects are awayfrom the moonroof before closing it.

Auto Reverse

Moonroof

Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

０７／０７／０３　２０：５５：１９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１０６　

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns theadjustment switch off to keep yoursettings.

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

2.

3.

4.

1.

On all models except U.S. DX

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors

102

SELECTOR SWITCH ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

TAB

０７／０７／０３　２０：５５：２８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１０７　

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page ).

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off. Pressing this button alsoturns the rear window defogger onand off.

59

On All EX-L, Canadian LX, EX, and Simodels

Parking BrakeHeated Mirrors

Mirrors, Parking Brake

Instruments

andC

ontrols

103

PARKING BRAKE LEVERHEATED MIRROR BUTTON

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles. A beeper will soundif the vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

０７／０７／０３　２０：５５：３４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１０８　

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch; ON (right), Door Activated,and OFF (left). In the DoorActivated (center) position, the lightcomes on when you:

Open any door.Remove the key from the ignition.Unlock the doors with the key orthe remote transmitter.

The front ceiling light has a two-position switch; Door Activated andOFF.

The front ceiling light has twospotlights. Push the spotlight lensesto turn them on and off.

After all doors are closed tightly, thelight(s) dims slightly, then fades outin about 30 seconds.

If you do not open any door after youunlock the driver’s door or removethe key from the ignition switch, thelight(s) fades out in about 30seconds.

If you leave any door open withoutthe key in the ignition switch, theceiling light(s) will go off after 3minutes.

On models with moonroof

On models with moonroof

Ceiling Light

Spotlights

Interior Lights

104

DOOR ACTIVATED

OFFOFF

ON

SWITCHES

DOORACTIVATED

０７／０７／０３　２０：５５：４５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１０９　

＊＊

＊

Push on the spotlight lenses to turnthe light on and off.

On all LX models, and EX and EX-Lmodels without moonroof

Interior Convenience Items

Interior Lights, Interior Convenience Items

Instruments

andC

ontrols

105

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT CENTER POCKET

COAT HOOK

GLOVE BOX


BEVERAGEHOLDERS

BEVERAGE HOLDERS ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

VANITY MIRRORCOIN BOX

If equipped:

０７／０７／０３　２０：５５：５１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１１０　

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids candamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

To close, lower the lid, and push itdown until it latches.

To open the console compartment,pull up on the lever, and lift the lid.

Open the front beverage holder bysliding its cover backward.The rear seat also has a beverageholder in the center armrest. To useit, pivot the armrest down.

This socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps). It will not power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement.

To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the left. Close it with a firmpush.

The EX, EX-L, and Si models haveanother accessory power socket inthe center console compartment.When more than one socket is beingused, the combined power rating ofthe accessories should be 120 wattsor less (10 amps).

If equipped

Beverage Holders Console Compartment

Accessory Power Socket

Glove Box

Interior Convenience Items

106

LEVER


CONSOLECOMPARTMENT

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

０７／０７／０３　２０：５６：０２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１１１　

The heating and air conditioningsystem in your vehicle provides acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This sectiondescribes those features and how touse them. (If you have an optionalaudio system, refer to the operatinginstructions that came with it.)

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 108...........................Using the A/C . 110

................................Audio System . 112Audio System (Models without

...............navigation system) . 114......................Playing the Radio . 115

Playing the XM Satellite...................Radio (Optional) . 119

............................Playing a Disc . 124...Disc Player Error Messages . 130

Audio System (Models with...............navigation system) . 132

......Playing the AM/FM Radio . 132Playing the XM Satellite

......................................Radio . 136............................Playing a Disc . 144

...Disc Player Error Messages . 152.....................Playing a PC Card . 153

........PC Card Error Messages . 165............AM/FM Radio Reception . 166

..................Protecting Your Discs . 168................Remote Audio Controls . 171

......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 172.................Radio Theft Protection . 173

..........................Setting the Clock . 174............................Security System . 175

...............................Cruise Control . 176

All models except U.S. DX

All U.S. models except DX

Features

Features

107

０７／０７／０３　２０：５６：０９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１１２　

Turn the dial clockwise to increasethe fan speed and airflow. Turn thedial counterclockwise to decrease it.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. Theindicator in the button is on whenthe A/C is on.

When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

If equipped

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Fan Control Dial

Recirculation Button

Temperature Control Dial

108

TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL

MODE BUTTONS

FAN CONTROL DIAL

MAX A/C BUTTON

(If equipped)

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGERBUTTON

(All EX-L,Canadian LX,EX, and Simodels)

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

０７／０７／０３　２０：５６：１８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１１３　

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

Use the mode control buttons toselect the vents air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardcorner vents in all modes.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents. When you select , thesystem automatically switches tofresh air mode.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and defroster vents atthe base of the windshield.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches tofresh air mode and turns on the A/C(if equipped).

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C, selects , andswitches to recirculation mode. Eachindicator in the button is on whenthe MAX A/C is turned on.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear sidepanels.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

1.

2.3.4.

74

If equipped


Rear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control

MAX A/C Button

Ventilation

Features

109

０７／０７／０３　２０：５６：３５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１１４　

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Select .Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.Make sure the temperature is set

to maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in fresh air mode.

To cool the interior with MAX A/C:Set the fan to the desired speed.Select MAX A/C.The system automatically turns onthe A/C, selects , andswitches to recirculation mode.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.

Turn the fan on.If the A/C is off, turn it on (ifequipped).Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry andcan prevent the windows fromfogging up.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

1.2.3.

3.4.

5.

1.

2.

1.2.

3.

1.2.

3.4.

67

If equipped

If the interior is very warm,


Using the Heater

Using the A/C

Dehumidify the Interior

110

０７／０７／０３　２０：５６：４７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１１５　

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . When you select

, the system automaticallyswitches to fresh air mode andturns on the A/C (if equipped).The A/C indicator will not comeon, if it was previously off.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel next to each vent.This sends more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select fresh airmode to avoid fogging the windows.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

Turning the fan speed control dial allthe way to the left shuts the systemoff.

Keep the system off for shortperiods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

When you switch to , fromor , the A/C stays on.

This helps prevent the windows fromrapidly fogging up when the air issuddenly routed away from thewindshield. If you want to turn theA/C off, press and release the A/Cbutton twice. The indicator in thebutton comes on and then goes off.

Select . When you select, the system automatically

switches to fresh air mode andturns on the A/C (if equipped).The A/C indicator will not comeon, if it was previously off.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

5.

1.

2.3.

1.

2.

3.

4.


To Defog and Defrost

To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

To Turn Everything Off

Features

111

０７／０７／０３　２０：５６：５８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１１６　

An audio system is standard on allmodels except the U.S. DX. Read theappropriate pages (as shown below)to use your vehicle’s audio system.

For vehicles with navigation system,see pages through .

If your vehicle has a different audiosystem, refer to its manual foroperating instructions.

For vehicles without navigationsystem, see pages through .131

132

114

165

Audio System

Models without navigation system

112

All models except Si

０７／０７／０３　２０：５７：０４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１１７　

Audio System

Features

Models with navigation system

113

Si model U.S. EX, EX-L, and Si models

０７／０７／０３　２０：５７：０８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１１８　

To change the letter, select theprevious segment by pushing thebottom of the SEEK button.

Turn the TUNE knob to change aletter.

Push the top of the SEEK buttonto select the next segment, thenturn the TUNE knob to select aletter. Repeat this procedure to setyour message.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 5 seconds after youstop selecting a letter.Push and hold the TUNE knob,

then push the power/volume knobon the audio control panel. Youwill see the first letter blinking.

Make sure the audio system is off.

To select a character:

You can set up to about 16characters on the display.

You can also customize this welcomemessage to your liking with theaudio controls.

Your audio system shows a welcomemessage on the display when youturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. You can see a message‘‘WELCOME’’ on the display whenyour vehicle was new.

2.

3.

4.1.

Si model only

Audio System (Models without navigation system)

To Customize a Message

114

TUNE KNOBPOWER/VOLUMEKNOB

SEEK BUTTON

０７／０７／０３　２０：５７：１９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１１９　

CONTINUED


Playing the RadioF

eatures

115

TUNE/SOUND KNOB

AUTO SELECT BUTTONAM/FM BUTTONAMBUTTON

FMBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

TUNE/SOUND KNOB

SCANBUTTON

SEEK BUTTON

Si model

PRESET BUTTONS

SEEK BUTTONPWR/VOL KNOB

AUTO SELECT BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

PRESET BUTTONS


０７／０７／０３　２０：５７：２６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１２０　

－

－

－－

－

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of theSEEK button, then release it.

Each side of the buttons(1 through 6) can store onefrequency on AM, and twofrequencies on FM.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

Pick a preset number (1 6), andhold it until you hear a beep.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwelve stations.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM orFM button (the AM/FM button).Adjust the volume by turning thepower/volume knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton (AM or FM button). On theFM band, ST will be displayed if thestation is broadcasting in stereo.Stereo reproduction in AM is notavailable.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

1.

2.

3.

4.

TUNE

SCAN

SEEK Preset

To Select a Station


116

０７／０７／０３　２０：５７：３５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１２１　

－

To turn off auto select, press theA. SEL (auto select) button. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

Press the SOUND (TUNE) knobrepeatedly to display the bass (BAS),treble (TRE), fader (FAD), balance(BAL), and speed-sensitive volumecompensation (SVC) settings.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the SOUND(TUNE) knob to adjust the setting toyour liking. When the level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’ inthe display. The system willautomatically return the display tothe selected audio mode about 5seconds after you stop adjusting amode.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM, and twelve FM stations inthe preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

CONTINUED

Adjusting the SoundAUTO SELECT


Features

117

０７／０７／０３　２０：５７：４３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１２２　

－

－－

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BALANCE adjusts the side-to-sidestrength, while FADER adjusts thefront-to-back strength.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control buttons to adjustthe illumination of the audio system(see page ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

The SVCmode controls the volume based onvehicle speed. The faster you go, thelouder the audio volume becomes.As you slow down, the audio volumedecreases.

The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. The default setting is MID.Turn the SOUND (TUNE) knob toadjust the setting to your liking.If you feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.

Use the TREBLE/BASS modes to adjust the tone toyour liking.

73Balance/Fader

Audio System LightingSpeed-sensitive volumecompensation (SVC)

Treble/Bass


118

０７／０７／０３　２０：５７：４８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１２３　

XM satellite radio receives signalsfrom two satellites to produce clear,high-quality digital reception. Itoffers many channels in severalcategories. Along with a largeselection of different types of music,XM satellite radio allows you to viewchannel and category selections inthe display.

XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.

Your audio system is capable ofreceiving XM Satellite Radioanywhere in the United States,except Hawaii and Alaska.

Playing the XM Satellite Radio


Features

Optional on U.S. EX, EX-L, and Simodels

119

DISPLAY BUTTONPOWER/VOLUME KNOB

SCAN BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS TUNE KNOB

AUX BUTTON

U.S. Si model is shown

０７／０７／０３　２０：５７：５５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１２４　

－

－

－

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

Turn the TUNE knob tochange channel selections. Turn theknob right for higher numberedchannels and left for lowernumbered channels. In the categorymode, you can only select channelswithin that category.

In channel mode, you can select allof the available channels. In categorymode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,etc., you can select all of thechannels within that category.

To listen to XM radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position. Push thepower/volume knob to turn on theaudio system, and press the ‘‘AUX’’button. Adjust the volume by turningthe knob. The last channel youlistened to will show in the display.

Each time you press and release theDISP button, the display changes inthe following sequence: Channelname, channel number, category,artist name, and music title.

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,press and hold the DISP button untilthe mode changes.

Press either side ofthe SEEK/SKIP button ( or

) to select another category.

Operating the XM Radio

TUNE

MODE

SEEK/SKIP


120

０７／０７／０３　２０：５８：０１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１２５　

－

－

－

－

－

－

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button. Thesystem plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, press thebutton again.

You can store up to 12preset channels using each side ofthe preset button. Each side of thebutton stores one channel from theXM1 band and one channel from theXM2 band.

To store a channel:

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune to a desiredchannel.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

XM is loading theaudio or program information.

The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.

Pick a preset number you want forthat channel. Press and hold thebutton until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper side of the presetbutton to tune to it.Press the AUX button. Either XM1

or XM2 will show in the display.

Press the AUX button again. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

SCAN

Preset

XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’


Features

121

０７／０７／０３　２０：５８：１３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１２６　

－

－

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.

The selected channelnumber does not exist, or is not partof your subscription, or this channelhas no artist or title information atthis time.

There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’


122

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

０７／０７／０３　２０：５８：１９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１２７　

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

Large items carried on a roof rack.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM radioreception.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, push thepower/volume knob to turn on theaudio system and press the AUXbutton. A variety of music types andstyles will play.

If you decide to purchase XMsatellite radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, turn the TUNE

knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in thesatellite radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, you’ll beable to listen to XM radio broadcasts.XM Radio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contact XMRadio.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

Receiving Satellite Radio Service


Features

123

０７／０７／０３　２０：５８：２９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１２８　


Playing a Disc

124

SCANBUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

RANDOMBUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BUTTONSEEK/SKIP BUTTON


DISPLAYBUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

CD BUTTONEJECT BUTTON REPEAT BUTTON LOAD INDICATOR

DISPLAYBUTTON

Si model

LOAD INDICATOR

CD BUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

FOLDER KNOBPWR/VOL KNOB FOLDER KNOB

SCANBUTTON

０７／０７／０３　２０：５８：３７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１２９　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

To load or play discs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.

NOTE:If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays FORMAT, and then skips tothe next file.

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way to play it. Youoperate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio.The number of the current track andthe elapsed time are shown in thedisplay. When playing a disc in MP3or WMA, the numbers of the currentfolder and file, and the elapsed timeare shown. The system willcontinuously play a disc until youchange modes.

Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

Compatible with variable bit rateand multi-session

Bit rate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps

The specifications of the compatibleWMA file are:



Bit rate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)

The specifications of the compatibleMP3 file are:

Video CDs and DVD discs do notwork in this unit.

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHzYou operate the disc player with the

same controls used for the radio. Toselect the disc player, press the CDbutton. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in thedisplay.

This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA formats. Whenplaying a disc in MP3, you will see‘‘MP3’’ in the display. In WMAformat, ‘‘WMA’’ will appear in thedisplay. You can select up to 99folders, or up to 255 tracks/files.

CONTINUED

To Play a Disc

To Load a Disc


Features

125

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

０７／０７／０３　２０：５８：５０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１３０　

－

＞

Use the SEEK/SKIP button while adisc is playing to select passages andchange tracks (files in MP3/WMAmode).

Each time youpress and release the side ofthe SEEK/SKIP button, the playerskips forward to the beginning of thenext track (file in MP3 or WMAmode). Press and release the

side to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to skip to the beginning ofthe previous track.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or side of theSEEK/SKIP button.

With the folder name, you will seethe FOLDER indicator in the display.The TRACK indicator is shown withthe file or track name.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

Each time you press the DISP button,the display shows you the text dataon a disc, if the disc was recordedwith text data.

You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and thealbum, artist, and track tag.

The display shows up to about 16characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.). If thetext data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator in

the display. Press and hold the DISPbutton until the next 16 charactersare shown.

You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:

When a new folder, file, or track isselected.

When you change the audio modeto play a disc with text data or inMP3 or WMA.

When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

When playing a CD-DA with textdata, the album and track name areshown in the display. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, the display shows thefolder and file name.

To Change or Select Tracks/Files

Text Data Display Function

SEEK/SKIP


126

０７／０７／０３　２０：５９：０１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１３１　

－

－

－

－

－

Toselect a different folder, turn theTUNE knob to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Turnthe knob to the right to skip to thenext folder, and to the left to move tothe beginning of the current folder.Turn it again to skip to the beginningof the previous folder. Turning theTUNE knob more than one clickskips several folders at a time.

To continuously replaya track (files in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button.You will see RPT in the display.Press and hold the RPT button for 2seconds to turn it off.

This feature,when activated, replays all files onthe selected folder in the order theyare compressed. To activate folder

repeat, press the RPT button twice.You will hear a beep and see F-RPTin the display. The systemcontinuously replays the currentfolder. Press the RPT button again toturn it off. Pressing the RDM button,or selecting a different folder withthe TUNE knob also turns off therepeat feature.

Each time you press and release theRPT button, the mode changes fromfile repeat to folder repeat, then tonormal playing.

This feature plays thetracks within a disc (the files in MP3or WMA mode) in random order. Toactivate random play, press andrelease the RDM button. In MP3 orWMA mode, press the RDM buttonrepeatedly to select RDM (within adisc random play). You will see RDMin the display. Press the RDM buttonfor 2 seconds to return to normal

play.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays allfiles on the selected folder in randomorder. To activate folder random,press and release the RDM button.You will see F-RDM in the display.The system will then select and playfiles randomly. This continues untilyou deactivate folder random bypressing and holding the RDMbutton for 2 seconds, or by selectinga different folder with the TUNEknob.

Each time you press and release theRDM button, the mode changesfrom folder random play to randomplay (within a disc random play),then to normal playing.

CONTINUED

In MP3 or WMA mode

In MP3 or WMA mode

In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER SELECTION

REPEAT (TRACK/FILEREPEAT)

FOLDER-REPEAT

RANDOM (Random within adisc)

FOLDER-RANDOM


Features

127

０７／０７／０３　２０：５９：０９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１３２　

－－

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP button also turns off the scanfeature.

Each time you press and release theSCAN button, the mode changesfrom folder scan to scan, then tonormal playing.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadit after 10 seconds and put it in pausemode. To begin playing, press theCD button.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

The scan function samples all tracks(files in MP3 or WMA) on the disc inthe order they are recorded on thedisc. To activate scan, press theSCAN button. In MP3 or WMAmode, press the SCAN buttonrepeatedly to select SCAN. You willsee SCAN in the display. You will geta 10 second sampling of each track/file on the disc. Press the SCANbutton again to get out of scan modeand play the last track/file sampled.

Thisfeature, when activated, samples thefirst file of each folder on the disc.To activate folder scan, press theSCAN button twice. You will seeF-SCAN in the display.

The system plays the first file in thefirst folder for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system will thenplay the first files in the remainingfolders for 10 seconds each. Afterplaying the first file of the last folder,the system plays normally.

Pressing either side of the SEEK/SKIP button, selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE knob, orpressing the SCAN button, also turnsoff the folder scan.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button(AM or FM button). Press the CDbutton again to switch back to theCD player.

In MP3 or WMA mode To Stop Playing a DiscSCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)F-SCAN (FOLDER SCAN)


128

０７／０７／０３　２０：５９：１８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１３３　

－＋

－＋

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.

Load the desired discs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

To select the disc changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use the preset 4(DISC ) or the preset 1 (DISC )on the preset button. To select theprevious disc, press the preset 4(DISC ), or the preset 1 (DISC )to select the next disc in sequence.

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available disc to load andplay.

An optional six or eight disc changeris available for your vehicle. Thisdisc changer uses the same controlsused for the in-dash disc player orthe radio. For information on how to handle

and protect compact discs, see page.168

Operating the Optional DiscChanger

Protecting Discs


Features

129

０７／０７／０３　２０：５９：２５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１３４　

＊

＊Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out the disc.

For the additional information ondamaged discs, see page .

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.

The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.

SolutionError Message Cause

: Except Si model

169

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Current track will be skipped. The nextsupported track or file plays automatically.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s).Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 169 ). Insert the disc again. If thecode does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannotbe removed, consult your dealer. Do not try toforce the disc out of the player.

High temperature

Track/File format notsupported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Disc Player Error Messages


130

HEAT ERROR

UNSUPPORTFORMAT

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNER’SMANUAL PUSH

EJECTBAD DISC

PLEASE CHECKOWNER’SMANUAL

０７／０７／０３　２０：５９：３２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１３５　



If there is still a problem, the errormessage will appear again. Press theeject button, and pull out the disc.

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

SolutionError Message Cause

Press the magazine eject button, and pull themagazine out. If the message does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,see your dealer.Insert disc.

Press the magazine eject button, pull themagazine out, check for an error message, theninsert the magazine again. If the message doesnot disappear, or the magazine cannot be pulledout, see your dealer.Insert disc magazine.

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

FOCUS Error

No disc in the discmagazine

Mechanical Error

No disc magazine inthe disc changerHigh Temperature


Optional Disc Changer ErrorMessages

Features

131

０７／０７／０３　２０：５９：４２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１３６　

In addition to the standard audiocontrols, the audio system in yourvehicle can be operated using thevoice control system. See thenavigation section in your QuickStart Guide for an overview of thissystem, and the Navigation SystemManual for complete details.

Audio System (Models with navigation system)

Playing the AM/FM RadioVoice Control System

132

TUNE BAR

AUTO SELECTICON

BACKGROUNDICON

AM/FMBUTTON

AUDIOBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

FM2 ICON

AM ICONFM1 ICON

SOUND ICON

０７／０７／０３　２０：５９：４８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１３７　

－

▲ ▼

▲

▼

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe power/volume knob.

Pushing the AUDIO button will alsoturn on the system.

You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Use thecontrol buttons on the left side of thescreen. The status bar appears onthe bottom of the screen each timeyou operate any of the controlbuttons. On the navigation screen,you can also see audio informationby touching the AUDIO INFO iconon the lower of the screen.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton, or touch the desired bandicon (FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, or XM2).On the FM band, STEREO will bedisplayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

For information on XM radio, seepage .

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the side of the bar to tuneto a higher frequency, and press the

side to tune to a lowerfrequency.

Press and hold the or side ofthe TUNE bar until you hear twobeeps to change the frequencyrapidly. Release the bar when thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.

136

CONTINUED


To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station

TUNE

Features

133

０７／０７／０３　２０：５９：５７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１３８　

－

－

▲ ▼

－

Each preset button’s frequency isshown on the bottom of the audiodisplay.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press and hold the or side ofthe TUNE bar until you hear a beep,then release it.

The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.


Preset

SEEK

SCAN

134

０７／０７／０３　２１：００：０５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１３９　

－ If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the AUDIO button to view theaudio control icons, then press theAUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTOSEL flashing in the display, and thesystem goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM, and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons as previously described.

press theAUTO SEL icon. This restores thepresets you originally set.

For information on AM/FM radiofrequencies and reception, see page

.166

To turn off auto select,


AUTO SELECTF

eatures

135

０７／１０／２６　１４：１０：５３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１４０　

Audio System (Models with navigation system)Playing the XM Satellite Radio

136

TUNE BAR

SCAN BUTTON

JOYSTICK

CATEGORYINDICATOR

AUDIO BUTTON

XM RADIOBUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

AM/FM BUTTON

PRESET CHANNELNUMBER

XM RADIO ICON MODE ICON

０７／０７／０３　２１：００：１６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１４１　

－

CONTINUED

Your audio system is capable ofreceiving XM Satellite Radioanywhere in the United States,except Hawaii and Alaska.

XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.

XM radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.When you press and hold theAUDIO button, the display alsoshows all XM information.

To listen to XM radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position. Push thepower/volume knob to turn on theaudio system, and press the CD/XMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe knob. The last channel youlistened to will show in the display.

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,touch the MODE icon. In channelmode, you can select all of theavailable channels. In category mode,such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.,you can select all of the channelswithin that category. Each time youtouch and release the MODE icon,the display changes between thechannel mode and the categorymode.

You can also change to the XM radiowhile you are listening to an FMstation, AM station, disc, pc card, etc.,by touching the XM1 or XM2 icon onthe audio display.

You can also operate the radio usingthe control buttons on the left side ofthe screen. The status bar appearson the bottom of the screen eachtime you press any of the controlbuttons. On the navigation screen,you can also see the audioinformation by touching the AUDIOINFO icon on the lower of the screen.


Operating the XM Radio MODEF

eatures

137

０７／０７／０３　２１：００：２４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１４２　

－－

－

－

▼▲

Pick the preset button (icon) youwant for that channel. Press andhold the button (icon) until youhear a beep.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune to a desiredchannel.

Press the XM button. Either XM1or XM2 will show in the display.

To store a channel:

You can store up to 12preset channels using each presetbutton or preset icons on the screen.Each preset button or icon storesone channel from the XM1 band andone channel from the XM2 band.

Press the TUNE bar tochange channel selections. Press

for higher numbered channelsand for lower numberedchannels. In the category mode, youcan only select channels within thatcategory.

Press and holdeither side of the TUNE bar( or ) until you hear a beepto select another category.

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activatescan, press the SCAN button ortouch the SCAN icon on the screen.The system plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want to listento, press the button or touch the iconagain.

On the audio display, you will see theselected CHANNEL (number),CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),and TITLE (music title).

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

1.

2.

3.


PresetTUNE

CATEGORY

SCAN

138

０７／０７／０３　２１：００：３３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１４３　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

CONTINUED

The signal iscurrently too weak. Move the vehicleto an area away from tall buildings,and with an unobstructed view of thesouthern horizon.

XM is loading theaudio or program information.

The channelcurrently selected is no longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is being updated. Wait until theencryption code is fully updated.Channels 0 and 1 should still worknormally.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Press the XM button again ortouch the other XM icon (XM1 orXM2) on the audio display. Storethe next six channels using steps 2and 3.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper preset button(icon) to tune to it. Each presetbutton’s channel is shown on thebottom of the audio display.

The selected channelnumber does not exist or is not partof your subscription.

There is a problemwith the XM antenna. Please consultyour dealer.

This channel has noartist or title information at this time.

4.

5.

‘‘NO SIGNAL’’XM Radio Display Messages

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’

‘‘NO INFO’’


Features

139

０７／０７／０３　２１：００：４２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１４４　

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator. Carryinglarge items on a roof rack can alsoblock the signal.


140

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

０７／０７／０３　２１：００：４７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１４５　

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in thesatellite radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

If you decide to purchase XMSatellite Radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, press the TUNE

bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

Large items carried on a roof rack.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM radioreception.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, you’ll beable to listen to XM radio broadcasts.XM Radio will continue to send anactivation signal to your vehicle forat least 12 hours from the activationrequest. If the service has not beenactivated after 36 hours, contact XMRadio.

If your XM Satellite Radio servicehas expired or you purchased yourvehicle from a previous owner, youcan listen to a sampling of thebroadcasts available on XM SatelliteRadio. With the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position,push the power/volume knob to turnon the audio system and press theXM button. A variety of music typesand styles will play.


www.xmradio.com

Receiving Satellite Radio Service


Features

141

０７／０７／０３　２１：００：５８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１４６　

－

－－

－

－

－

You can adjust the sound on thenavigation screen. To adjust thesound, push the AUDIO button, thenenter the sound grid by touching theSOUND icon on the display.

Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound. To adjust thefront/rear fader, touch the FR or RRicon.

Adjusts the bass.Adjusts the treble. To

adjust the treble and bass, touchor on each side of the

treble or bass adjustment bar. Theadjustment bar on the right lowerdisplay shows you the currentsetting.

Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.To adjust the left/right balance,touch the L or R icon.

Adjusts thestrength of sound from thesubwoofer speaker. To adjust thesound strength, touch or

on each side of the adjustmentbar.

The right upper display shows youthe current setting of the soundstrength coming from each speaker.

The SVC modecontrols the volume based on vehiclespeed. The faster you go, the louderthe audio volume becomes. As youslow down, the audio volumedecreases. Touch the appropriateicon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select themode.


Adjusting the Sound

FADER

BASSTREBLE

BALANCE

SUBWOOFER

SVC (speed-sensitive volumecompensation)

142

SOUND ICON

SPEAKER SETTING

BASS/TREBLE SETTING

０７／０７／０３　２１：０１：１０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１４７　

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control buttons to adjustthe illumination of the audio system(see page ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is off.

You can select the backgroundscreen to display the sound level.There are three screen modes: level(the sound level is shown with thevertical bars), spectrum analysis (thesound level appears as ripples ofwater), and off. Each time you touchthe background icon, the displaychanges.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 5 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.

You can also select the icon with thejoystick. Move it up and down tomove the highlighting and scrollthrough lists. Select the icon, thenmove the joystick to left or right tochange the setting.

This function is set to MID as thedefault setting when the vehicleleaves the factory. If you feel thesound is too loud, choose low. If youfeel the sound is too quiet, choose Hi. 73

Audio System Lighting


Screen ModeF

eatures

143

０７／０７／０３　２１：０１：１６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１４８　

－

＋

Audio System (Models with navigation system)Playing a Disc

144

SCAN BUTTON

JOYSTICK

AUDIO BUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

OPEN BUTTON

CD BUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON REWIND BUTTON

FAST FORWARDBUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

TUNE BAR

CD ICON

０７／０７／０３　２１：０１：２２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１４９　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

You operate the disc player with thesame controls used for the radio. Toload or play discs, the ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position.

Video CDs and DVD discs do notwork in this unit.

Compatible with variable bit rateand multi-sessionMaximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

This audio system can also play CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in MP3or WMA formats. When playing adisc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3’’ onthe screen. In WMA format, ‘‘WMA’’will appear on the screen. You canselect up to 99 folders and play up to999 tracks. If the disc has a complexstructure, it takes a while to read thedisc before the system begins to playit.

NOTE:If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays CD FORMAT, and thenskips to the next file.



The specifications for compatibleMP3 files are:

The specifications for compatibleWMA files are:

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)Bit rate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHzBit rate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps

CONTINUED


To Play a DiscF

eatures

145


０７／０７／０３　２１：０１：３４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１５０　

The disc player is behind thenavigation screen. To use the discplayer, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the disc player appears.

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way and begin toplay it.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button onthe edge of the screen panel. Do notuse the folded screen as a tray. Ifyou put a cup, for example, on thescreen, the liquid inside the cup mayspill on the screen when you go overa bump.


To Load a Disc

146

OPEN BUTTON

DISC SLOT

CLOSE BUTTON

０７／０７／０３　２１：０１：４１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１５１　

－

－

Push the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andoperate the disc player.

You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Press theCD button. The status bar appearson the bottom of the screen. On thenavigation screen, you can see theaudio information whenever youtouch the AUDIO INFO icon on thelower portion of the screen.

When playing a CD recorded withtext data, the track, album, and artistname are shown on the audio display.When playing a disc in MP3 or WMA,the folder number and name, the filenumber and name, the artist name,and the elapsed time are shown. Thesystem will continuously play a discuntil you change modes. If the discwas not recorded with text data, itwill not be displayed.

You can also select an icon with thejoystick. Move it to left, right, up, ordown to change the highlighting andscroll through lists. Then press theENT on the top of the joystick toselect the icon.

Each time you press andrelease (preset 6), the playerskips forward to the beginning of thenext track (file in MP3 or WMAmode). Press and release

(preset 5), to skip backward tothe beginning of the current track.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.

You can use the preset buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks (files in MP3 orWMA mode). Each preset button’sfunction is shown on the bottom ofthe screen.

To move rapidly withina track/file, press and hold

(preset 4) or (preset 3).

CONTINUED



SKIP

FF/REW

Features

147

PRESET BUTTONS

PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION

０７／０７／０３　２１：０１：５０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１５２　

－

▲▼

－

－

－

－Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE bar to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Pressthe side of the TUNE bar to skipto the next folder, and the side tomove to the beginning of the currentfolder. Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

To continuously replaya track (file in MP3 or WMA mode),press and release the RPT button(preset 1). You will see TRACKREPEAT in the display. Press andhold the RPT button for 2 seconds toturn it off.

This feature,when activated, replays all files onthe selected folder in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrepeat, press and hold the RPTbutton (preset 1). You will seeFOLDER REPEAT in the display.The system continuously replays thecurrent folder. Press the RPT buttonagain to turn it off. Pressing theRDM button or selecting a differentfolder with the TUNE bar also turnsoff folder repeat.

Thisfeature plays the tracks within a disc(the files within a folder) in randomorder. To activate track random,press and release the RDM button(preset 2). You will see TRACKRANDOM in the display. Press andhold the RDM button for 2 secondsto return to normal play.

Thisfeature, when activated, plays allfiles in each folder in random order,rather than in the order they arecompressed. To activate folderrandom, press the RDM button(preset 2) twice. You will seeFOLDER RANDOM in the display.The system then selects and playsfiles randomly. This continues untilyou deactivate folder random bypressing the RDM button again, or ifyou select a different folder with theTUNE bar.

In MP3 or WMA modeIn MP3 or WMA mode In MP3 or WMA mode


FOLDER SELECTION

TRACK REPEAT (FILEREPEAT)

FOLDER REPEAT

TRACK RANDOM (Randomwithin a disc/folder)

FOLDER RANDOM

148

０７／０７／０３　２１：０１：５７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１５３　

－－

CONTINUED

You can also select a track/filedirectly from a track list on the audiodisplay. Press the AUDIO button toshow the audio display, then touchthe Track List icon. The track listmenu appears on the display.

Pressing either SKIP button (preset5 or 6) also turns off scan.

The scan function samples all tracks(files in MP3 or WMA) in the orderthey were recorded. To activate scan,press and release the SCAN button.You will see TRACK SCAN in thedisplay. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each track/file on thedisc. Press and hold the SCANbutton for 2 seconds to get out ofscan mode and play the last track/file sampled.

This feature,when activated, samples all the firstfiles in each folder on the disc inorder. To activate folder scan, pressand hold the SCAN button. You willsee FOLDER SCAN in the display.

The system plays the first file ineach folder for about 10 seconds. Ifyou do nothing, the system thenplays the first file in each folder for10 seconds each. After playing thefirst file of the last folder, the systemgoes to normal playing.

Pressing either SKIP button (preset5 or 6), or selecting a different folderwith the TUNE bar, or pressing theSCAN button, also turns off folderscan.

In MP3 or WMA mode


Using a Track ListSCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)FOLDER SCAN

Features

149

FOLDER ICON TRACK/FILE ICON

FOLDER NUMBER RETURN ICON

０７／０７／０３　２１：０２：０６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１５４　

▲ ▼

To remove a disc from the audio unit,fold back the screen by pressing theOPEN button (see page ). Pressthe disc eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadit after 10 seconds and put it in pausemode. To begin playing, press theCD button.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button.

When playing a CD recorded withtext data, each track name is shownon the audio display. With a discrecorded in MP3 or WMA, the foldernumber and the location are alsodisplayed.

You cannot close the screen if a discis partially inserted into its slot.

You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

If the disc was not recorded with textdata, only the track number is shown.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon on thescreen.

Select the desired track/file bytouching the icon on the display. Theselected icon will be highlighted inblue. The system begins to play theselected track/file. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, touch the folder iconon the upper left of the screen tomove to the parent folder. Thecurrent folder is highlighted in blue.

To play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button ortouch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, orXM2 icon. If a PC card is in the audiounit, touch the CARD icon to playthe PC card. Press the CD buttonagain or touch the CD icon to switchback to the disc player.

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the disc willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the disc will beginplaying where it left off.

146


Removing a DiscTo Stop Playing a Disc

150

０７／０７／０３　２１：０２：１５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１５５　

▲▼

Load the desired discs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

To select the disc changer, press theCD/AUX button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use either side of theTUNE bar. To select the previousdisc, press the side. To select thenext disc, press the side.

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available disc to load andplay.

For information on how to handleand protect discs, see page .An optional six or eight disc changer

is available for your vehicle. Thisdisc changer uses the same controlsused for the in-dash disc player orthe radio.

168

Operating the Optional DiscChanger

Protecting Discs


Features

151

０７／０７／０３　２１：０２：２１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１５６　



If there is still a problem, the errormessage will appear again. Press theeject button, and pull out the disc.

Insert a different disc. If the newdisc plays, there is a problem withthe first disc. If the error messagecycle repeats and you cannot clear it,take your vehicle to a dealer.

Error Message Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

TOC Error

High Temperature

Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check if it is inserted correctly in the discplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.For more information, see page 169.Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation. Formore information, see page 169.If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your dealer.Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation. Formore information, see page 169.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.


Disc Player Error Messages

152

０７／０７／０３　２１：０２：２９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１５７　

＋

－

Playing a PC Card


Features

153

REPEAT BUTTON

SKIP BUTTONRANDOMBUTTON

FAST FORWARDBUTTON

JOYSTICK

PLAY MODEICON

PC CARD ICONTRACK LIST ICON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

OPEN BUTTON

CD/XM BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

TUNE BAR

REWIND BUTTON SKIP BUTTON

０７／０７／０３　２１：０２：３６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１５８　

－

－

－

－

You operate the PC card player withthe same controls used for the radioand the disc player. To load or play acard, the ignition switch must be inthe ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

The PC card player reads and playscards in MP3 or WMA formats.Depending on the format, the screenwill indicate ‘‘MP3’’ or ‘‘WMA’’ whena card is playing. The card limit ofthe player is 99 folders and 999tracks. If the card has a complexstructure, it takes some time for thesystem to begin playing it.

Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2,the recommended PC cards for thePC card reader are:

Always use the recommendedmemory card with the appropriateadapter (if an adapter is needed).Some memory cards will not work inthis unit.

When you insert a PC card intothe slot, make sure you put it instraight. If you cannot insert it,remove it, and insert again.

Do not keep PC cards in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage them.

To avoid damaging the cardreader, do not insert hard discdrive cards into the PC card slot.

You cannot close the screen(move it to the upright position)until the PC card is inserted all theway into its slot or removed.

Never insert foreign objects intothe PC card slot.

The specifications for compatibleMP3 files are:


SD memory card

CompactFlashFlash ATA

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)Bit rate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)


To Play a PC card

154

NOTE:

０７／０７／０３　２１：０２：４８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１５９　

－

－

－

－

CONTINUED


In WMA format, DRM (digital rightsmanagement) files cannot be played.If the system finds a DRM file, itskips that file and plays the nextavailable folder or file.

The PC card slot is behind thenavigation screen. To use the PCcard player, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the PC card slot appears.

Insert a PC card straight into the slot.The drive will read the PC card andbegin to play it.

Return the screen to the uprightposition by pressing the CLOSEbutton on the edge of the screenpanel.

Push the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andoperate the PC card player.

You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Press anyof the appropriate control buttons.The status bar appears on thebottom of the screen. On thenavigation screen, you can see theaudio information whenever youtouch the AUDIO INFO icon on thescreen.

The specifications for compatibleWMA files are:

Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHzBit rate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps


Loading a PC CardF

eatures

155

PC CARD SLOT

０７／０７／０３　２１：０２：５８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１６０　

There are three play modes: Folder,Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAYMODE icon, then choose one of themodes by touching its icon. When amode is selected, it is highlighted inblue.

If play mode information was notincluded in the tracks when theywere added to the card, it will not bedisplayed on the screen.

Folder mode plays tracks in theorder they were added to the card.

Artist mode plays tracks inalphabetical order, by artist andsong title.

Album mode plays albums(folders) in alphabetical order.


To Select a Play Mode

156

FOLDER MODE

MODE INDICATOR

PLAY MODE ICON

PLAY MODE ICON PLAY MODE ICON

MODE INDICATOR MODE INDICATOR

ARTIST MODE ALBUM MODE

０７／０７／０３　２１：０３：０８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１６１　

CONTINUED

To select a play mode, push theAUDIO button to show the audiodisplay, then touch the PLAY MODEicon on the display.

Select the desired mode by touchingthe appropriate icon, or move thejoystick, then press the ENT.

After you select the play mode, thedisplay changes to the selectableplaying menu. If you select‘‘Continue playing the Current Song,’’the system goes into the selectedplay mode after playing the currentfile.


Features

157

PLAY MODE ICON

０７／０７／０３　２１：０３：１５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１６２　

If you select ‘‘Play a New Track List,’’the system goes into the selectedplay mode immediately and begins toplay the files in order to the new list.

To go back to the previous screen,press the CANCEL button on theright side of the screen. To exit theplay mode screens, press the AUDIObutton.

You can use the preset buttons whilea card is playing to select or changefiles. Each preset button’s function isshown on the bottom of the screen.

Icons on the screen can also beselected with the joystick. Move thejoystick left or right and up or downuntil the icon is highlighted, thenpress the ENT on the top of thejoystick to select the icon.



158

PRESET BUTTONS

PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION

０７／０７／０３　２１：０３：２２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１６３　

－

－

－

▲▼

－

－

－

－

Each time you press andrelease (preset 6), the playerskips forward to the beginning of thenext file. Press and release

(preset 5), to skip backward tothe beginning of the current file.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous file.

To move rapidly withina file, press and hold (preset 4)or (preset 3).

Toselect a different folder, press eitherside of the TUNE bar to move thebeginning of the next folder. Pressthe side of the TUNE bar to skipthe next folder, and to the side tomove the beginning of the currentfolder. Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

To continuously replaya file, press and release the RPTbutton (preset 1). You will seeTRACK REPEAT in the display.Press the RPT button again to turn itoff.

This feature, whenactivated, replays all the files on theselected folder/artist/album in theorder they are recorded or listed. Toactivate each repeat mode, press andhold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2seconds. You will see FOLDERREPEAT, ARTIST REPEAT orALBUM REPEAT in the display.The system continuously replays thecurrent folder/artist/album. Pressand hold the RPT button for 2seconds again to turn it off. Pressingthe RDM button, or selecting adifferent folder/artist/album withthe TUNE bar also turns off therepeat feature.

This featureplays the files within a folder inrandom order. To activate trackrandom, press and release the RDMbutton (preset 2). You will seeTRACK RANDOM in the display.Press and hold the RDM button for 2seconds to return to normal play.

This feature, whenactivated, plays all files in eachfolder/artist/album in random order,rather than in the order they arerecorded or listed. To activate eachrandom play, press the RDM button(preset 2) 2 times. You will seeFOLDER RANDOM, ARTISTRANDOM or ALBUM RANDOM inthe display.

CONTINUED


SKIP

FF/REW

FOLDER SELECTION

TRACK REPEAT (FILEREPEAT)

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMREPEAT

TRACK RANDOM (Randomwithin a folder)

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMRANDOM

Features

159

０７／０７／０３　２１：０３：２９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１６４　

－

－The system then selects and playsfiles randomly. This continues untilyou deactivate each random play bypressing the RDM button again, oryou select a different folder/artist/album with the TUNE bar.

Pressing either of the SKIP buttons(preset 5 or 6) also turns off the scanfeature.

The scan function samplesall files on the PC card in the orderthey are recorded. To activate scan,press and release the SCAN button.You will see TRACK SCAN in thedisplay. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each file on the PC card.Press and hold the SCAN button for2 seconds to get out of scan modeand play the last file sampled.

This feature, whenactivated, samples the first file ineach folder/artist/album on the PCcard in order. To activate each scanfeature, press and hold the SCANbutton until you hear a beep. You willsee FOLDER SCAN, ARTIST SCANor ALBUM SCAN in the display.

The system plays the first file in thefolder for about 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system plays the firstfile in each folder, in order, for 10seconds each. After playing the firstfile of the last folder/artist/album,the system returns to normal play.

Pressing either of the SKIP buttons(preset 5 or 6), selecting a differentfolder/artist/album with the TUNEbar, or pressing the SCAN button,also turns off the scan feature.


SCAN

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMSCAN

160

０７／０７／０３　２１：０３：３５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１６５　

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

You can also select a file directlyfrom a track list on the audio display.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio display, then touch the TrackList icon. The track list menuappears on the display.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon.

To play a file, touch its icon on thescreen. In folder mode, touch thefolder icon on the upper left of thescreen to move to the parent folder.The current folder is highlighted inblue.

In artist mode, the artist name is alsodisplayed on the right side of eachselectable icon. Select the desiredfile.


Using a Track ListF

eatures

161

RETURN ICON

FOLDER ICON

TRACK LIST ICON

ARTIST NAME

０７／０７／０３　２１：０３：４４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１６６　

In album mode, the album name isalso displayed on the right side ofeach selectable icon. Select thedesired file.

When you select ‘‘Song Search’’ fromthe track list display, the song searchmenu appears.

You can then select any of threemodes to search a file: Title byKeyword, Artist, and Album.


Song Search Function

162

ARTIST ICON

TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON

RETURN ICON

SONG SEARCH ICON

ALBUM ICONFolder mode is shown.

ALBUM NAME

０７／０７／０３　２１：０３：５２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１６７　

▲ ▼

Searching for a Song Title by Keyword Searching for a Song by Artist Name

In Title by Keyword mode, enter thetitle name, or any keyword, bytouching the letter icons on thescreen. Press the List icon to beginthe song search. If you press theCANCEL button on the screen, thedisplay returns to the mode menuwithout doing a search.

To cancel the selected letter, selectthe letter and touch the Delete icon.To select more characters, touch theMore icon. The other character listwill be shown.

After the system searches for a song,a file list is displayed. To scrollthrough the list, touch the oricon on the side of the screen. Selectthe desired file by touching theappropriate icon, or moving thejoystick and pressing the ENT.

Select the Artist icon, and the artistlist appears. Select the desired artist,and the artist’s file list is displayed.

CONTINUED


Features

163

MORE ICON

DELETE ICON LIST ICON

FILE LIST

ARTIST LIST

０７／０７／０３　２１：０４：０１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１６８　

Searching for a Song by Album Name

Select the Album icon, and thealbum list appears. Select the desiredalbum, and its song list is displayed.You can then select the desired songfrom the list.

To play the radio when a PC card isplaying, press the AM/FM button ortouch the FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, orXM2 icon. If a disc is in the audiounit, press the CD button or touchthe CD icon to play the disc. Touchthe CARD icon to switch back to thePC card player.

If you turn the system off while a PCcard is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turningoff the ignition switch, the card willstay in the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the card will beginplaying where it left off.

When you leave the vehicle, alwaysremove the PC card from the audiounit.

To remove a PC card from the audiounit, fold back the screen bypressing the OPEN button (see page

). Press the eject button ( )to remove the card. If you do notremove it from the slot, you cannotreturn the screen to the uprightposition.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button.

You can also eject a card when theignition switch is off.

If there is a problem with the PCcard player, see your dealer.

146


To Stop Playing a PC card

PC Card Player Malfunction

Removing a PC Card

164

ALBUM LIST

０７／０７／０３　２１：０４：１０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１６９　

Error MessageIf you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a PC card, findthe solution in the chart to the right.If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.

Solution

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the disc. There is apossibility that the files have been damaged.It appears when the PC card is empty or there are no MP3 or WMA files inthe PC card. Save the MP3 or WMA files in the PC card.It appears when the unsupported PC card is inserted. The system supportsCF card, Flash ATA card, and SanDisk 6-in-1 Card Adapter.


PC Card Error MessagesF

eatures

165

FILE ERROR

NO MUSIC

MEDIA ERROR

０７／０７／０３　２１：０４：１５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１７０　

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

AM/FM Radio Reception

166

０７／０７／０３　２１：０４：２３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１７１　

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.


AM/FM Radio Reception

Features

167

０７／０７／０３　２１：０４：２９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１７２　

When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on therecording surface of the disc,causing skipping or other problems.Remove these pieces by rubbing theinner and outer edges with the sideof a pencil or pen.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip pens, can cause the disc to notplay properly, or possibly jam in thedrive.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by thesystem.

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,use only high quality discs labeledfor audio use.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe disc player.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

Play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped discs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your Discs

168


０７／０７／０３　２１：０４：３９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１７３　

Examples of these discs are shownto the right:

Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

The disc player/changer has asophisticated and delicatemechanism. If you insert a damageddisc as indicated below, it maybecome stuck inside and damage theaudio unit.

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED

Additional Information ofRecommended Discs


Features

169

Warped BurrsChipped/Cracked

Bubbled/Wrinkled

With Label/Sticker

Using PrinterLabel Kit

Sealed With PlasticRing

０７／０７／０３　２１：０４：５０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１７４　

Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs

CD-R or CD-RW may not play dueto the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on thediscs may cause the sound to skip.

Recommended discs are printedwith the following logo.

Audio unit may not play thefollowing formats.

4. 5.


170

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Arrow ShapeCan Shape

０７／０７／０３　２１：０５：００　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１７５　

▲ ▼

＋

－

＋－

＋

－

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,disc (if a disc is loaded), or a PC card(if it is loaded). On models withsatellite radio system, you can alsoselect XM radio.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press and release thetop ( ) of the button, the systemgoes to the next preset station on theband you are listening to. Press andrelease the bottom ( ) to go back tothe previous station.

To activate the seek function, pressand hold the top ( ) or bottom ( )of the CH button until you hear a

beep. The system searches up ordown from the current frequency tofind a station with a strong signal.

If you are playing a disc, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack (file in MP3 or WMA format)each time you press the top ( ) ofthe CH button. Press the bottom( ) to return to the beginning of thecurrent track or file. Press it twice toreturn to the previous track or file.

You will see the track/file numberand the elapsed time. If the disc hastext data or is compressed in MP3 orWMA, you can also see any otherinformation (track title, file name,folder name, etc.).

If equipped

CONTINUED

Remote Audio Controls

Features

171

CH BUTTON MODE BUTTON

VOL BUTTON

０７／０７／０３　２１：０５：０９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１７６　

＋

－

＋

－

If you are playing a PC card, pressthe top ( ) of the CH button toadvance to the next file. Press thebottom ( ) to go back to theprevious file.

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can usethe seek function to select folders.Press and hold the top ( ) of theCH button until you hear a beep, toskip forward to the first file of thenext folder. Press the bottom ( ) toskip backward to the previous folder.

When a compatible audio unit isconnected to the jack, press the AUXbutton to select it.

The auxiliary input jack isunderneath the accessory powersocket on the front panel. Thesystem will accept auxiliary inputfrom standard audio accessories.

On all models except DXAuxiliary Input Jack

Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack

172

０７／０７／０３　２１：０５：１４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１７７　

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific digit code using thepreset buttons (icon on vehicle’s withnavigation system). Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from specificdigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or theradio fuse is removed, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘ENTERCODE’’ in the frequency display thenext time you turn on the system.Use the preset buttons (icons onvehicles with navigation system) toenter the code. The code is on theradio code card included in yourowner’s manual kit. When it isentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thesequence, then enter the correctcode. You have 10 tries to enter thecorrect code. If you are unsuccessfulin 10 attempts, you must then leavethe system on for 1 hour beforetrying again.If you lose the card, you must obtain

the code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system’sserial number.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s code andserial numbers. It is best to store thiscard in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

On all models except U.S. DX

Radio Theft Protection

Features

173

０７／０７／０３　２１：０５：１９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１７８　

On models with navigation system

On models without navigation system

The navigation system receivessignals from the global positioningsystem (GPS), and the displayedtime is updated automatically by theGPS. Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

To set the time, press the CLOCK(AM, AM/FM) button until thedisplayed time begins to blink, thenrelease the button.

Change the hours by pressing the H(preset 1) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minutes by pressing the M(preset 2) button until the numbersadvance to the desired time.

Press the CLOCK (AM, AM/FM)button again to enter the set time.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing theCLOCK (AM, AM/FM) button untilyou hear a beep, then pressing the R(preset 3) button sets the clock backto the previous hour. If the displayedtime is after the half hour, the clocksets forward to the beginning of thenext hour.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

Setting the Clock

174

HOUR BUTTON RESET BUTTONHOUR BUTTON RESET BUTTON

MINUTE BUTTON MINUTE BUTTON

CLOCK BUTTONCLOCK BUTTON

Si modelAll models except Si

０７／０７／０３　２１：０５：２９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１７９　

Once the security system is set,opening any door, the trunk, or thehood without using the key or theremote transmitter will cause it toalarm. It also alarms if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights (low beam), parkinglights, side marker lights, andtaillights flash if someone attemptsto break into your vehicle or removethe radio. This alarm continues for 2minutes, then it stops. To reset analarming system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or theremote transmitter.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and trunk. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,driver’s lock tab, door lock masterswitch, or remote transmitter. Thesecurity system indicator on theinstrument panel starts blinkingimmediately to show you the systemis setting itself.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the master keyor the remote transmitter withouttriggering the alarm. The alarm willsound if the trunk lock is forced, orthe trunk is opened with the trunkrelease handle.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the door and trunk openindicators on the instrument panel(see page ) to see if the doors andtrunk are fully closed. Since it is notpart of the monitor display, manuallycheck the hood.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

To see if the system is setafter you exit the vehicle, press theLOCK button on the remotetransmitter within 5 seconds. If thesystem is set, the horn will beeponce.

61

If equipped

Security System

Features

175

NOTE:

Except Si Si

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

０７／０７／０３　２１：０５：３８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１８０　

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel cruisecontrol. To resume the set speed,press the RES/ACCEL button. Theindicator on the instrument panel willcome back on.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Press and release the SET/DECEL button on the steeringwheel. The CRUISE CONTROLindicator on the instrument panelcomes on to show the system isnow activated.

1.

2.

3.If equipped Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

176

CANCELBUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON RES/ACCELBUTTON

SET/DECELBUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

０７／０７／０３　２１：０５：４７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１８１　

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes the cruisecontrol to cancel.To increase the speed in very

small amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Tap the brake or clutch pedal

lightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator onthe instrument panel goes out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

Push on the accelerator pedal untilyou reach the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

Features

177

０７／０７／０３　２１：０５：５５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１８２　

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remember the previouslyset cruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h), and then press andrelease the RES/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator comeson. The vehicle will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system off and erases theprevious cruising speed.

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed

Cruise Control

178

CRUISE BUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

０７／０７／０３　２１：０６：０３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１８３　

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 180.................Fuel Recommendation . 180

.........Service Station Procedures . 181....................................Refueling . 181

Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 182

...................................Oil Check . 183.............Engine Coolant Check . 185

...............................Fuel Economy . 186...Accessories and Modifications . 189

.............................Carrying Cargo . 191

Before Driving

Before

Driving

179

０７／０７／０３　２１：０６：０６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１８４　

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

We recommend using qualitygasolines containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour authorized dealer for service.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy, metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon premium unleaded gasoline with apump octane number of 91 or higher.Use of a lower octane gasoline cancause occasional metallic knockingnoises in the engine and will result indecreased engine performance. Useof a gasoline with a pump octanenumber less than 87 can lead toengine damage.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Do not tow a trailer.

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation


Si model only

180

０７／０７／０３　２１：０６：１６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１８５　

CONTINUED

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10% ethanol byvolume and up to 15% MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

You may hear a knocking noise fromthe engine if you drive the vehicle atlow engine speed (below about 1,000rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,raise the engine speed by shifting toa lower gear.

Open the fuel fill door by pushingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

1.

2.On Si model

Refueling

Quick Start Guide

Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures

Before

Driving

181

Push

FUEL FILL CAP

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

０７／０７／０３　２１：０６：２６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１８６　

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle under the lower leftcorner of the dashboard. Thehood will pop up slightly.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,the malfunction indicator lampmay come on (see page ). Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Place thecap in the holder on the fuel filldoor.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapor from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

1.

5.

6.4.

3.

278

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Service Station Procedures

Opening and Closing the Hood

182

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

０７／０７／０３　２１：０６：３３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１８７　

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up to release it.Lift up the hood.

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

Pull the support rod out of its clipby holding the grip, and insert theend into the designated hole in thehood.

To close the hood, lift it up slightlyto remove the support rod fromthe hole. Put the support rod backinto its holding clip. Lower thehood to about a foot (30 cm) abovethe fender, then let it drop. Makesure it is securely latched.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

Insert it all the way back in its tube.

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

3.

1.

2.

3.2.

CONTINUED


Oil CheckB

eforeD

riving

183

DIPSTICKSUPPORT ROD

LATCHGRIP

Except Si

０７／０７／０３　２１：０６：４５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１８８　

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

4.232


Adding Engine Oil

184

LOWER MARK

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

Si

Except Si Si

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

０７／０７／０３　２１：０６：５１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１８９　

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

236

228

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

Engine Coolant Check

Service Station Procedure

Before

Driving

185

MAX

MIN

MAX

MINExcept Si Si

RESERVE TANK RESERVE TANK

０７／０７／０３　２１：０６：５７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１９０　

－

－－

－

Fuel economy is not a fixed number.It varies based on driving conditions,driving habits and vehicle condition.Therefore, it is not possible for oneset of estimates to predict fueleconomy precisely for all drivers inall environments.

Provides an estimated annual fuelcost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000km) per year multiplied by the costper gallon (based on EPA fuel costdata) divided by the combined fueleconomy.

For more information on fueleconomy ratings and factors thataffect fuel economy, visit

(Canada: Visit)

Represents urbandriving in a vehicle in light traffic. Arange of miles per gallon achieved isalso provided.

The EPA fuel economy estimatesshown in the example to the rightare a useful tool for comparisonwhen buying a vehicle. EPAestimates include:

Represents a combination of city andhighway driving. The scalerepresents the range of combinedfuel economy for other vehicles inthe class.

Represents amixture of rural and interstatedriving, in a warmed-up vehicle,typical of longer trips in free-flowingtraffic. A range of miles per gallon

achieved is also provided.

www.fueleconomy.gov www.vehicles.gc.ca

Fuel Economy

Actual Mileage and EPA FuelEconomy Estimates Comparison.

Estimated Annual Fuel Cost

City MPGCombined Fuel Economy

Highway MPG

186

Combined FuelEconomy

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Estimated AnnualFuel Cost

City MPG Highway MPG

０７／０７／０３　２１：０７：０６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１９１　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Aggressive driving (hardacceleration and braking)Excessive idling, accelerating andbraking in stop-and-go trafficCold engine operation (enginesare more efficient when warmedup)Driving with a heavy load or theair conditioner runningImproperly inflated tires

The following factors can lower yourvehicle’s fuel economy:

A properly maintained vehiclemaximizes fuel economy. Poormaintenance can significantly reducefuel economy. Always maintain yourvehicle according to the maintenancemessages displayed on theinformation display (see

on page ).For example:

Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking increase fuelconsumption.

Aerodynamic drag has a big effecton fuel mileage at speeds above 45mph (75 km/h). Reduce yourspeed and you reduce the drag.Trailers, car top carriers, roofracks and bike racks are also bigcontributors to increased drag.

If your vehicle has amanual transmission, you canboost your fuel economy by upshifting as early as possible.

Idlingresults in 0 miles per gallon.

An under-inflated tire increases‘‘rolling resistance,’’ which reducesfuel economy.

It puts a heavierload on the engine, increasing fuelconsumption.

Inparticular, a build-up of snow ormud on your vehicle’s undersideadds weight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fueleconomy.

228CONTINUED

Fuel Economy

Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscositymotor oil, displaying the APICertif ication Seal (see page

).

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Drive moderately

Observe the speed limit

Always drive in the highest gearpossible

Avoid excessive idling

Maintain proper tire inflation

Avoid carrying excess weight inyour vehicle

Keep your vehicle clean

232

Vehicle Maintenance

Drive EfficientlyB

eforeD

riving

187

０７／０７／０３　２１：０７：２０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１９２　

－

－

Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.Reset trip counter to zero.Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.Follow one of the simple calculations above.

The A/Cputs an extra load on the enginewhich makes it use more fuel. Usethe fresh-air ventilation whenpossible.

Combine several short trips intoone. A warmed-up engine is morefuel efficient than a cold one.

Direct calculation is therecommended source of informationabout your actual fuel economy.Using frequency of fill-ups or takingfuel gauge readings are NOTaccurate measures of fuel economy.Fuel economy may improve over thefirst several thousand miles.

1)2)3)4)

Fuel Economy

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Minimize the use of the airconditioning system

Plan and combine trips

Calculating Fuel Economy

188

Miles perGallon

100 Kilometers

Gallonsof fuel

Milesdriven

Liter L per100 km

０７／０７／０３　２１：０７：２９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１９３　

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle, or improve its performance.These accessories have beendesigned and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system (ifequipped).

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withthe proper operation of yourvehicle.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. Accessories installed inthese areas may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

280

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before

Driving

189

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

０７／０７／０３　２１：０７：３７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１９４　

＊

＊

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Some examples are:

Lowering your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and will not becompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) .

: If equipped

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

190

０７／０７／０３　２１：０７：４５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１９５　

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove box

Console compartmentDoor pockets

Trunk, including the rear seatswhen folded down

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Center pocket

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

191

GLOVE BOX

CENTER POCKETTRUNK

DOOR POCKETS

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

０７／０７／０３　２１：０７：５２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１９６　

－The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S.A, 395 kgfor Canada.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

See Tire And Loading Informationlabel attached to the driver’sdoorjamb.

Label Example

Locate the statement ‘‘Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.’’ on your vehicle’splacard.

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

(3)

(2)

(1)

Load Limits

Carrying Cargo

192

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

０７／０７／０３　２１：０８：０１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１９７　

－ ×

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the ‘‘XXX’’ amountequals 1,400 lbs. and there will befive 150 lb. passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs.(1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). Bothare on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

(4)

(5)

(6)

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

193

Passenger Weight(150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)



Max Load (850 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Cargo Weight(550 lbs)



０７／０７／０３　２１：０８：１４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１９８　

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

If you fold down the back seat, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

Do not put any items on top of thetrunk panel. They can block yourview and be thrown around thevehicle during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunderneath and interfere with theproper operation of the seats, thesensors under the seats, or thedriver’s ability to operate thepedals.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

51

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Carrying Cargo

194

０７／０７／０３　２１：０８：２０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０１９９　

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and automatic transmissions.It also includes importantinformation on parking your vehicle,the braking system, the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system, the tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS),and facts you need if you areplanning to tow a trailer.

........................Driving Guidelines . 196

........................Preparing to Drive . 197.......................Starting the Engine . 198

...................Manual Transmission . 199..............Automatic Transmission . 202

...........................................Parking . 206.............................Braking System . 207

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 208Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

........................................System . 210Tire Pressure Monitoring

........................System (TPMS) . 212...........................Towing a Trailer . 215

Driving

Driving

195

０７／０７／０３　２１：０８：２４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２００　

Because of the low-profile tiresfitted to your vehicle, the alloywheels are closer to the ground.Driving over a pothole or roaddebris at too high a speed canseriously damage a wheel. Slowdown under these conditions.

Curbs and steep inclines coulddamage the front and rearbumpers. Low curbs that do notaffect the average vehicle may behigh enough to hit the bumper onyour vehicle. The front or rearbumper may scrape when trying todrive onto an incline, such as asteep driveway or trailer ramps.

Use caution if you ever drive yourvehicle on very rough or ruttedroads. You could damage thesuspension and underbody bybottoming out. Going too fast overparking lot ‘‘speed bumps’’ canalso cause damage.

Your vehicle is designed to give youoptimum handling and performanceon well-maintained roads. As part ofthis design, your vehicle has aminimum of ground clearance andvery low-profile tires.

Driving Guidelines

Si model

196

０７／１０／２６　１４：１１：００　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２０１　

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood and trunk arefully closed.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your vehicle.

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure (see page ).

1.

2.

3.

4. 9.

8.

7.

6.

5. 10.91

75

14

57

254

102

Preparing to Drive

Driving

197

０７／０７／０３　２１：０８：４０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２０２　

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown, and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

Press the clutch pedal down all theway. The START (III) positiondoes not function unless the clutchpedal is pressed.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

1.

2.

3.

4.

6.

5.

Manual transmission:

Automatic transmission:

Starting the Engine

198

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

77

０７／０７／０３　２１：０８：４９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２０３　

CONTINUED

The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from fifth toreverse.

On vehicles with 6-speed manualtransmission, the lockout systemprevents you from shifting directlyfrom any forward gear to reversewhile the vehicle is moving at acertain speed (see page ).

When shifting up or down, makesure you push the clutch pedal downall the way, shift to the next gear,and let the pedal up gradually. Whenyou are not shifting, do not rest yourfoot on the clutch pedal. This can

cause your clutch to wear out faster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoreverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into reverse, or shift into oneof the forward gears for a moment.This stops the gears so they won’t‘‘grind.’’

201

The engine can be damaged ifyou inadvertently downshift into thewrong gear (for example, going fromthird gear at high rpms to second gearinstead of upshifting to fourth gear; theengine speed limiter will not work in thissituation).

On Si model

Manual Transmission

Driving

199

Note:

Except Si Si

０７／０７／０３　２１：０８：５７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２０４　

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear.

Your vehicle is equipped with analuminum shift lever. If you leave thevehicle parked outside for a long

time on a hot day, be careful beforemoving the shift lever. Because ofthe heat, the shift lever may beextremely hot. If the outsidetemperature is low, the shift leverfeels cold.

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effectiveemissions control. The followingshift points are recommended:

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)27 mph (43 km/h)39 mph (63 km/h)53 mph (85 km/h)

Normal acceleration

17 mph (27 km/h)29 mph (47 km/h)37 mph (60 km/h)43 mph (69 km/h)49 mph (79 km/h)

With 5-speed manual transmission

With 6-speed manual transmission

On Si model

Recommended Shift Points

Manual Transmission

200

Rapid slowing or speeding upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

０７／０７／０３　２１：０９：０４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２０５　

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Your vehicle has a rev limit indicatorto show you when the engine speedis near the tachometer’s red zone(see page ).

If you are still unable to shift toreverse, apply the parking brake,and turn the ignition key to theACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

With the clutch pedal still pressed,start the engine.

Press the clutch pedal, and shift toreverse.

If you need to use this procedure toshift to reverse, your vehicle may bedeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

The manual transmission haslockout so you cannot accidentallyshift from any forward gear toreverse while the vehicle is movingat a certain speed. If you cannot shiftto reverse when the vehicle isstopped, do the following.

With the clutch pedal pressed,move the shift lever to the first/second gear side of the neutralgate, then shift to reverse.

1.

2.

3.

4.

64

6-speed manual transmission

On Si model

Engine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout

Manual Transmission

Driving

201

０７／０７／０３　２１：０９：１３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２０６　

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.

To shift from Park to any position,press firmly on the brake pedal andpress the release button on the frontof the shift lever, then pull the lever.You cannot shift out of Park whenthe ignition switch is in the LOCK(0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

202

SHIFT LEVER

RELEASEBUTTON

０７／０７／０３　２１：０９：２１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２０７　

－

－

－

－

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal, andpress the shift lever releasebutton.

Press the shift lever releasebutton.

Move the shift lever.

3

3

3

3

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the front of the shift leverto move it.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. You must also press therelease button to shift into Park. Theshift lever must be in Park beforeyou can remove the key from theignition switch.

Press the brakepedal and press the release button toshift from Park to reverse. To shift

from reverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop and then shift. Pressthe release button before shiftinginto reverse from neutral.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 5) for yourspeed and acceleration. You maynotice the transmission shifting up athigher engine speeds when theengine is cold. This helps the enginewarm up faster.

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.205

CONTINUED


Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

Drive (D)

Neutral (N)

Driving

203

０７／０７／０３　２１：０９：２８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２０８　

－－

－

This position issimilar to D, except only the firstthree gears are selected. Use Dwhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain,or to provide engine braking whengoing down a steep hill. D can alsokeep the transmission from cyclingbetween third, fourth, and fifth gearsin stop-and-go driving.

To shift to second,press the release button on the frontof the shift lever. This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

Use second gear:For more power when climbing.

To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.

For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

To help reduce wheel spin.

To shift from second tofirst, press the release button. Thisposition locks the transmission infirst gear. By upshifting anddownshifting through 1, 2, D , and D,you can operate the transmissionmuch like a manual transmissionwithout a clutch pedal.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

3

3

3


Drive (D ) Second (2)

First (1)

Engine Speed Limiter3

204

０７／０７／０３　２１：０９：３６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２０９　

Do this if pushing on the brake pedaland pressing the release button doesnot shift the transmission out ofPark:

Set the parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Insert a key into the shift lockrelease slot.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the lever outof Park to neutral.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then reinstall thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the shift lever side.Return the key to the ignitionswitch, press the brake pedal, andrestart the engine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

Put a cloth on the notch of theshift lock release slot cover. Usinga small flat-tipped screwdriver or ametal fingernail file, carefully pryon the notch of the cover toremove it.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Shift Lock Release


Driving

205

COVER

RELEASEBUTTON

SHIFT LOCKRELEASE SLOT

NOTCH

０７／０７／０３　２１：０９：４５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２１０　

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

Make sure the moonroof (ifequipped) and the windows areclosed.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Turn off the lights.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gear.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Lock the doors.

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

On vehicles with security system

Parking Tips

Parking

206

Never install a sunshade between theupper and lower meters on theinstrument panel. If you do, you couldcause heat damage to the upper meteron a very hot day.

０７／０７／０３　２１：０９：５４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２１１　

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Your vehicle is equipped with frontdisc brakes. The brakes on the rearwheels may be disc or drum,depending on the model. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The anti-lockbrake system (ABS) helps you retainsteering control when braking veryhard.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectivenessand reduces brake pad life. Inaddition, fuel economy can bereduced. It also keeps your brakelights on all the time, confusingdrivers behind you.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Braking System Design

Brake Pad Wear Indicators

Braking System

Driving

207

０７／０７／０４　１４：２３：０８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２１２　

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If the indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as instructedon page .

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

279You should never pump the brake pedal.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

ABS Indicator

208

０７／０７／０３　２１：１０：０８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２１３　

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

It only helps with thesteering control during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

The VSA indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

279

On vehicles with VSA system

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stopABS does not reduce the time or

distance it takes to stop thevehicle.

Important Safety Reminders

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Driving

209

０７／０７／０３　２１：１０：１５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２１４　

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output andby selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some noise from the VSAhydraulic system. You will also seethe VSA activation indicator blink.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA Activation indicator blinks.

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, the VSAsystem automatically turns on even ifthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switch (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA off switch again.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If equipped

211

On U.S. models

VSA Activation Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

210

０７／０７／０３　２１：１０：２４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２１５　

This switch is under the left vent.Press it to turn the VSA system onand off.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.

Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

260

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

VSA Off Switch VSA and Tire SizesD

riving

211

０７／１０／２６　１４：１４：１５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２１６　

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s tire information placard.

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver’s doorjamb.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

If you cannot make the low tirepressure indicator go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor (not including the spare tire).If the air pressure of a tire becomessignificantly low while driving, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator to come on.

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

266

U.S. models only Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

212

０７／０７／０３　２１：１０：４１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２１７　

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressureindicator to come on. Or, if youcheck and adjust your tire pressurein cooler conditions, and drive intoextremely hot conditions, the tiremay become overinflated. However,the low tire pressure indicator willnot come on if the tires areoverinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSindicator may also come on and stayon after driving several miles(kilometers).

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold, andset to the recommended inflationpressure as specified on the tire

information label and in the owner’smanual (see page ).

This indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.

If this happens, the system will shutoff and no longer monitor tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, the VSAsystem automatically turns on even ifthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switch (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA off switch again.

254

255

211

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator


Driving

213

０７／０７／０３　２１：１０：４９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２１８　




If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure indicator will come on.Replace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire (see page ).

Each wheel (except the compactspare tire wheel) is equipped with atire pressure sensor mounted insidethe tire behind the valve stem. Youmust use TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.

After you replace the flat tire withthe compact spare tire, the low tirepressure indicator stays on. This isnormal; the system is not monitoringthe spare tire pressure. Manuallycheck the spare tire pressure to besure it is correct. After several miles(kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the low tirepressure indicator goes off.

The low tire pressure indicator orthe TPMS indicator will go off, afterseveral miles (kilometers) driving,when you replace the spare tire withthe specified regular tire equippedwith the tire pressure monitor sensor.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

266

Changing a Tire with TPMS


214

０７／０７／０３　２１：１０：５７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２１９　

Your vehicle has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can also use it totow a trailer if you carefully observethe load limits, use the properequipment, and follow the guidelinesin this section.

Themaximum allowable weight of thetrailer and everything in or on itmust not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).Towing a load that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

The weight that thetongue of a fully-loaded trailer putson the hitch should be approximately10% of the total trailer weight. Toomuch tongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control. Toolittle tongue load can make thetrailer unstable and cause it to sway.

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:

Towing a Trailer

Driving

215

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

０７／０７／０３　２１：１１：０３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２２０　

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60% of the loadtoward the front of the trailer and40% toward the rear, then re-adjustthe load as needed.

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, allaccessories, all cargo, and thetongue load is:

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, allaccessories, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

(DX, LX, Canadian DX-G)

on the front axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the rear axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

(DX, LX, Canadian DX-G)

(Si)

(EX, EX-L)

(EX, EX-L)

(Si)

Checking Loads

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Towing a Trailer

216

3,924 lbs (1,780 kg)

3,737 lbs (1,695 kg)

3,671 lbs (1,665 kg)

1,830 lbs (830 kg)

2,094 lbs (950 kg)

1,764 lbs (800 kg)

1,973 lbs (895 kg)

1,731 lbs (785 kg)

1,940 lbs (880 kg)

０７／０７／０３　２１：１１：１３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２２１　

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, howmuch load you are towing, andwhere you tow.

Honda recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

See your trailer dealer or rentalagency for more information oninstalling electric brakes.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, province, and localregulations.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

CONTINUED

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Trailer BrakesHitches

Safety Chains

Towing a Trailer

Driving

217

０７／０７／０３　２１：１１：２３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２２２　

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, and localregulations. Check with your localtrailer dealer or rental agency for therequirements in your area, and useonly equipment designed for yourvehicle.

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.

Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

Additional Towing EquipmentTrailer Lights

Towing a Trailer

218

０７／０７／０３　２１：１１：２９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２２３　

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause the trailer tosway. When being passed by a largevehicle, keep a constant speed, andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the suspension,cooling system, and lights are ingood operating condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages and ).

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated, and the trailertires and spare are inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

215 216

bottom

Pre-Tow Checklist Backing Up

Parking

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Towing a Trailer

Driving

219

０７／０７／０３　２１：１１：３８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２２４　

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.If you have an automatictransmission, use D position whentowing a trailer on level roads. D isthe proper shift lever position to usewhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain.(See ‘‘ ’’ in the nextcolumn for additional gearinformation.)

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D .

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed, and shift down to secondgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember, it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

3 3

Driving Safely With a Trailer

Towing Speeds and Gears

Driving on Hills

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Towing a Trailer

220

０７／０７／０３　２１：１１：４７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２２５　

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance minder messages onthe information display, andinstructions for simple maintenancetasks you may want to take care ofyourself.

......................Maintenance Safety . 222....................Maintenance Minder . 223

..............................Fluid Locations . 230........................Adding Engine Oil . 232

Changing the Engine Oil....................................and Filter . 234

..............................Engine Coolant . 236....................Windshield Washers . 239

.......................Transmission Fluid . 240..........Automatic Transmission . 240

..............Manual Transmission . 241................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 242

....................Power Steering Fluid . 243.............................................Lights . 244

................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 250.....................................Floor Mats . 250

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 250.................................Wiper Blades . 251

...........................................Wheels . 253...............................................Tires . 254

...................Checking the Battery . 262.............................Vehicle Storage . 264

309

Maintenance

Maintenance

221

０７／１０／２６　１４：１４：２２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２２６　

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or qualifiedmechanic.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Injury from moving parts.

Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

222

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

０７／０７／０３　２１：１２：０２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２２７　

－－－－－－－－－－－－

CONTINUED

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)100 % 91 %90 % 81 %80 % 71 %70 % 61 %60 % 51 %50 % 41 %40 % 31 %30 % 21 %20 % 16 %15 % 11 %10 % 6 %5 % 1 %

0 %

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %15 %10 %5 %0 %

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe information display to show youwhen you should have your dealerperform engine oil replacement andindicated maintenance service.

Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and press the SEL/RESET button repeatedly until theengine oil life display appears (seepage ).

The remaining engine oil life isdisplayed on the information displayaccording to this table:

66

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life DisplayM

aintenance

223

SEL/RESET BUTTON

ENGINE OIL LIFE DISPLAY

０７／０７／０３　２１：１２：０９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２２８　

If the remaining engine oil life is 15to 6 percent, you will see the engineoil life indicator every time you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. The maintenance minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayednext to the engine oil life indicator.

When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE’’ message along with thesame maintenance item code(s),every time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

The 15 and 10 percent oil lifeindicator reminds you that the timeis coming soon to take your vehiclein for the required maintenance.

Maintenance Minder

224

ENGINE OIL LIFEINDICATOR

MAINTENANCEITEM CODE(S)

SERVICE MESSAGE

０７／０７／０３　２１：１２：１４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２２９　

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance, negative mileage isdisplayed and begins to blink afterthe vehicle has been driven 10 miles(10 km) or more.Negative mileage means yourvehicle has passed the maintenancerequired point.Immediately have the indicatedmaintenance done by your dealer.

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill blink. The display comes onevery time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Themaintenance minder indicator( ) also comes on and remainson in the instrument panel. Whenyou see this message, immediatelyhave the indicated maintenance doneby your dealer.

The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).

You can switch the display to theodometer, the trip meter, and theoutside temperature indicator (ifequipped) by pushing the SEL/RESET button on the dashboardrepeatedly.

When the engine oil life is 15 to 1percent, the maintenance minderindicator ( ) comes on everytime you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, then it goes outif you switch the information display.

When you see this message, havethe indicated maintenanceperformed by your dealer as soon aspossible.

226

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

225

NEGATIVE MILEAGE

０７／０７／０３　２１：１２：２３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２３０　

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Press the SEL/RESET buttonrepeatedly until the engine oil lifeindicator is displayed.

All maintenance items displayed onthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page .

You can change the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer, the tripmeter, or the outside temperature (ifequipped) every time you press andrelease the SEL/RESET button.

When the engine oil life is 0 percentor negative mileage, themaintenance minder indicator( ) remains on even if youchange the information display.

Immediately have the service done,and make sure to reset the display(see Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay).

1.

2.229

Maintenance Minder

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

226

MAINTENANCESUB ITEM

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

０７／０７／０３　２１：１２：３２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２３１　

CONTINUED

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.

Press the SEL/RESET button formore than 5 seconds. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

Press the SEL/RESET button forabout 10 seconds. The engine oillife and the maintenance itemcode(s) will blink.

4.3.

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

Maintenance

227

０７／０７／０３　２１：１２：３９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２３２　

－

－

－

－

－

－

＃

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by theinformation display.

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out yourHonda Service History or CanadianMaintenance Log. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

We recommend using Honda partsand fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same highquality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

183

185

240

242

254

244

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance,replacement, or repair ofemissions control devices andsystems may be done by anyautomotive repair establishmentor individual using parts that are‘‘certif ied’’ to EPA standards.

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

228

０７／０７／０３　２１：１２：４８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２３３　

＊

＊

＃

＃

＃

＊

Maintenance Minder

229

: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .

Independent of the maintenance minder display, replace the brake fluidevery 3 years.Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after thedisplay is reset, change the engine oil every year.

NOTE:

228

1 :

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replaceevery 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filterIf you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission fluidReplace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolant

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

AB

Symbol Symbol12

34

5

1

1

Main

tenance

Min

der

０７／０７／０３　２１：１２：５６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２３４　

＊

＊

Fluid Locations

Except Si model

230

RADIATOR CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

CLUTCH FLUID(ManualTransmission only)(Light gray cap)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

POWER STEERING FLUID(Red cap)

: Except Canadian DX-G with manual transmission

０７／１０／２６　１４：１４：２８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２３５　

Fluid Locations

Maintenance

Si model

231

RADIATOR CAP

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

CLUTCH FLUID(Light gray cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange handle)

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

０７／０７／０３　２１：１３：０４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２３６　

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-gradedetergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level onthe engine oil dipstick. Do not fillabove the upper mark; you coulddamage the engine.

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on the valve cover. Pour inthe oil slowly and carefully so you donot spill any. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

232

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Except Si Si

０７／０７／０３　２１：１３：１１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２３７　

－

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API certification seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the informationdisplay.

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.An oil with a viscosity of 5W-30 is

preferred for improved fuel economyand year-round protection in yourvehicle. You may use a 10W-30 oil ifthe temperature in your area nevergoes below 20°F ( 7°C).

Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle, toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

All models except Si:

Si model:

Adding Engine Oil

Maintenance

233

Ambient Temperature

Ambient Temperature

０７／０７／０３　２１：１３：２０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２３８　

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay. The oil and filter collectcontaminants that can damage yourengine if they are not removedregularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

1. 2.

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

234

WASHERDRAIN BOLTWASHER

DRAIN BOLT

Except Si Si

０７／０７／０３　２１：１３：２７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２３９　

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Refill the engine with therecommended oil.Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Make sure to clean off any dirtand dust on the connectingsurface of a new oil filter.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the engine block. If itis, remove it before installing anew oil filter.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3. 4.

Except Si

Si

CONTINUED

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

Maintenance

235

OIL FILTER

Except Si Si

3.9 US qt (3.7 )

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

4.6 US qt (4.4 )

０７／０７／０３　２１：１３：３８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２４０　

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel on the dipstick. If necessary,add more oil.

9. Adding Engine Coolant

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter, Engine Coolant

236

RESERVE TANK RESERVE TANK

SiExcept Si

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

０７／０７／０３　２１：１３：４４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２４１　

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Engine Coolant

Maintenance

237

RADIATOR CAP

Except Si

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０７／０７／０３　２１：１３：５１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２４２　

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

3. 4.

5.

6.

Engine Coolant

238

RADIATOR CAP RESERVE TANKRESERVE TANK

Si Except Si Si

０７／０７／０３　２１：１３：５９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２４３　

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

The low washerlevel indicator comes on when thelevel is low (see page ).

Check the fluid level by removingthe cap and looking at the levelgauge.

64

On Canadian models:

Windshield Washers

Maintenance

239

LEVEL GAUGE

LEVEL GAUGE

Except Si

Si

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

０７／０７／０３　２１：１４：０７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２４４　

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the levelbetween the upper and lowermarks.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spills immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid).

Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine, let it run until theradiator fan comes on, then shutoff the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 seconds (butno longer than 90 seconds) beforedoing step 2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

Transmission Fluid


240

DIPSTICK

LOWERMARK

UPPERMARK

０７／０７／０３　２１：１４：１６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２４５　

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt, and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger. The fluid level should be upto the edge of the bolt hole. If it isnot, add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the hole. Reinstallthe filler bolt, and tighten it securely.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The automatic transmission shouldbe drained and refilled with new fluidwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display.

6.

CONTINUED

Manual Transmission Fluid

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

241

FILLER BOLT

Correct Level

FILLER BOLT

Correct LevelExcept Si Si

Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Donot mix with other transmission f luids.Using transmission f luid other thanHonda Genuine ATF-Z1 may causedeterioration in transmission operationand durability, and could result indamage to the transmission.Damage resulting f rom the use oftransmission f luid other than HondaGenuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by theHonda new vehicle warranty.

０７／０７／０３　２１：１４：２６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２４６　

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

The manual transmission should bedrained and refilled with new fluidwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display.

If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Replace the brake fluid according tothe time recommendations in themaintenance minder schedule.

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoirs monthly.

Brake SystemBrake and Clutch Fluid

Transmission Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid

242

MAX

MIN

０７／０７／０３　２１：１４：３５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２４７　

Manual Transmission only

All models except Si and Canadian DX-Gwith manual transmissionThe fluid level should be between

the MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspill immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark.

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid

Power Steering FluidClutch FluidM

aintenance

243

LOWER LEVEL

UPPER LEVEL

MAX

MIN

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

０７／１０／２６　１４：１４：３９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２４８　

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

To change the headlight bulb onthe driver’s side, remove theengine coolant reserve tank bypulling it out of its holder.

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer, readjustmentmay be required. Adjustmentsshould be done by your dealer orother qualified technician.

1.

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb High Beam Headlight

Lights

244

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

０７／０７／０３　２１：１４：５０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２４９　

If you replaced a headlight bulb onthe driver’s side, reinstall theengine coolant reserve tank. To change the bulb on the driver’s

side, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theright, then turn off the engine. Tochange the bulb on the passenger’sside, turn the steering wheel to theleft.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender, and pull the innerfender cover back.

Remove the bulb by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

2.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

1.

CONTINUED

Lights

Low Beam HeadlightM

aintenance

245

TAB

HOLDING CLIPBULB

０７／０７／０３　２１：１５：００　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２５０　

To change the bulb on the driver’sside, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theright, then turn off the engine. Tochange the bulb on the passenger’sside, turn the steering wheel to theleft.

Reinstall the inner fender cover.Then reinstall the holding clips,and lock them in place by pushingon their centers.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

5.

6.

1.

7.

8.

3.

4.

Lights

Replacing the Front Side Marker/Parking/Turn Signal Light Bulb

246

TAB

HOLDING CLIPSOCKET

０７／０７／０３　２１：１５：０８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２５１　

Open the trunk.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender, and pull the innerfender cover back.

Remove the bulb from the socketby pushing the bulb in and turningit counterclockwise until it unlocks.

Remove the screw from the centerof each fastener on the side of thetrunk lining. Pull the lining back.

Determine which of the four bulbsis burned out: stop/taillight, back-up light, turn signal, or sidemarker.

Install the new bulb in the socket.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Reinstall the inner fender cover.Then reinstall the holding clips,and lock them in place by pushingon their centers.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3.

2.

2.

CONTINUED

Replacing Rear Bulbs(In Fenders)

Lights

Maintenance

247

FASTENER

FASTENER

０７／０７／０３　２１：１５：１９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２５２　

Open the trunk.Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Put the fasteners into the holes onthe side of the trunk lining.Reinstall the screws.

Reinstall the trunk lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal.


Remove the screw from the centerof each fastener on the trunk lidtrim. Pull the trim back.

1.

2.4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3.

On all EX-L, Canadian LX, EX, andSi models

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Trunk Lid)

248

BULBS

SOCKETS

SOCKETS

BULB

FASTENERSBULB

０７／０７／０３　２１：１５：３１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２５３　

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Open the trunk, and remove thesocket from the light assembly byturning it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise.Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.Reinstall the socket. Turn itclockwise until it locks. Make surethe new bulb is working.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket back into thelight assembly. Turn it clockwiseto lock it in place.


Put the fasteners into the holes onthe trunk lid trim. Reinstall thescrews.

Push the trunk lid trim back intoposition.

2.

1.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.3.

On all EX-L, Canadian LX, EX, andSi models

Lights

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Maintenance

249

BULB

SOCKET

BULB

SOCKET

０７／０７／０３　２１：１５：４１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２５４　

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

The floor mats that came with yourvehicle hook over the floor matanchors. This keeps them fromsliding forward and possiblyinterfering with vehicle operation.

If you remove the driver’s floor mat,make sure to re-anchor it when youput it back in your vehicle.

If you use non-Honda floor mats,make sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

Have your dealer replace the filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air, or if the flow fromthe heating and cooling systembecomes less than usual.

If equipped

On models with A/C

Floor Mats

Dust and Pollen Filter

Cleaning the Seat Belts

Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter

250

LOOP

０７／０７／０３　２１：１５：５１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２５５　

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every 6 months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, and areasthat are getting hard or if they leavestreaks and unwiped areas whenused.

To replace a wiper blade:

Lift the wiper arm off thewindshield, raising the driver’sside first, then the passenger’sside.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm:

Put a cloth on the edge of thelock tab, then push up on thelock tab carefully with a flat-tipscrewdriver.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

251

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

０７／０７／０３　２１：１５：５９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２５６　

Pivot the blade assembly towardthe wiper arm until it releasesfrom the wiper arm.

When replacing a wiper blade,make sure not to drop the wiperblade or wiper arm down on thewindshield.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Make sure the three rubber tabsinside the blade fit to each notch ofthe reinforcement, as shown.

Remove the blade from its holderby grabbing the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

3.

4.

Wiper Blades

252

BLADE

BLADEREINFORCEMENT

WIPER ARM

TOP

０７／０７／０３　２１：１６：０６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２５７　

Place the top of the wiper blade onthe end of the blade assembly, andslide the blade onto the assemblyin the direction pointed to by thearrow.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Push downthe lock tab. Make sure the wiperblade assembly locks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield, the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

Make sure the tab on the bladeassembly fits in the indent of thewiper blade and the blade iscompletely installed.

Clean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keeps thealuminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheels withharsh chemicals (including somecommercial wheel cleaners) or a stiffbrush can damage the clear-coat. Toclean the wheels, use a milddetergent and a soft brush or sponge.

5.

6.

7.If equipped

Wiper Blades, Wheels

WheelsM

aintenance

253

INDENT

TAB

０７／０７／０３　２１：１６：１４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２５８　

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) warns you when a tirepressure is low. See page formore information.

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think a

tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures.

212

On U.S. models

On Canadian models

Tires

Inflation Guidelines

254

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

０７／０７／０３　２１：１６：２４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２５９　

If you check air pressures when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

The following charts show therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .

Optional for Si

(LX, EX, EX-L)

(Si)

(DX, Canadian DX-G with automatictransmission)

295

(Canadian DX-G with manualtransmission)

Tire Size

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure

Cold Tire PressureTire Size Cold Tire Pressure



Tires

Recommended Tire PressuresM

aintenance

255

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

215/45ZR17 91W

P215/45R17 87V33 psi (230 kPa ,

2.3 kgf/cm )

33 psi (230 kPa ,2.3 kgf/cm )

P195/65R15 89H30 psi (210 kPa ,

2.1 kgf/cm )

P205/55R16 89H32 psi (220 kPa ,

2.2 kgf/cm )

P195/65R15 89S30 psi (210 kPa ,

2.1 kgf/cm )

Front/Rear:

Front/Rear:

Front/Rear:

Front/Rear:

Front/Rear:

０７／１０／２６　１４：１４：５９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２６０　

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

Tire pressure for high-speed drivingis the same as for normal driving.

When you return to normal speeddriving, be sure to readjust the tirepressure for normal driving. Youshould wait until the tires are coldbefore adjusting the tire pressure.

We strongly recommend that you donot drive faster than the postedspeed limits and conditions allow. Ifyou ever drive in a sanctionedcompetitive event at sustained highspeeds (over 118 mph or 190 km/h),be sure to adjust the cold tirepressures as shown below. If you donot, excessive heat can build up andcause sudden tire failure.

For convenience, the recommendedcold air pressures and tire sizes areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .

Front/Rear:

295

Si model only

Except Si model

Si model only

Tires

Tire InspectionTire Size·Cold Tire Pressure forHigh Speed Driving

High Speed Driving

256

P215/45R17 87V

35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )

０７／１０／２６　１４：１５：１１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２６１　

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see aband 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide bandacross the tread. This shows there isless than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadleft on the tire.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

The service life of your tires isdependent on many factors,including, but not limited to, drivinghabits, road conditions, vehicleloading, inflation pressure,maintenance history, speed, andenvironmental conditions (evenwhen the tires are not in use).

In addition to your regularinspections and inflation pressuremaintenance, it is recommended thatyou have annual inspectionsperformed once the tires reach fiveyears old. It is also recommendedthat all tires, including the spare, beremoved from service after 10 yearsfrom the date of manufacture,regardless of their condition or stateof wear.

The last four digits of the TIN (tireidentification number) are found onthe sidewall of the tire and indicatethe date of manufacture (See

on page ).297

Tires

Tire Service Life

TireLabeling

Maintenance

257

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

０７／１０／２６　１４：１５：２０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２６２　

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe information display. Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated. Ifyou purchase directional tires, rotateonly front-to-back.

When the tires are rotated, makesure the air pressures are checked.

The tires that came on your vehiclewere designed and constructed toprovide superior grip duringacceleration, braking, and cornering.

As a trade-off, they will wear morerapidly than tires used on ordinarypassenger vehicles. Because of thevehicle’s weight distribution, and thefact that the front wheels are thedriving wheels, you can expect themto wear more rapidly than the reartires.

On Si model onlyTire Maintenance Tire Rotation Tire Wear

Tires

258

Front Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

On vehicles with aluminum wheels,improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

０７／１０／２６　１４：１５：３３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２６３　

The mileage you can expect fromyour vehicle tires is the same ascomparable mid-and rear-enginesports cars, and it will vary greatlywith your driving habits.

If you drive moderately, the fronttires could last more than 10,000miles (16,000 km). However, themileage will be substantially less ifyou tend to drive your vehicle at theupper limits of its capabilities.

You should carefully inspect yourvehicle’s tires for wear, damage, andproper inflation every 7,500 miles(12,000 km).

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

The ABS and VSA system work bycomparing the speed of the wheels.When replacing tires, use the samesize originally supplied with thevehicle. Tire size and constructioncan affect wheel speed and maycause the ABS or VSA system toactivate.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels (if equipped). If youdo not, the tire pressure monitoringsystem will not work.

CONTINUED

Tires

Replacing Tires and WheelsM

aintenance

259

０７／１０／２６　１４：１５：４５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２６４　

Wheels:

Tires:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading, and page

for tire size and labelinginformation.

(DX, Canadian DX-G)

(summer tire)

(LX, EX, EX-L)

(Si)

(LX, EX, EX-L)

(Si)

(DX, Canadian DX-G withautomatic transmission)

(all season tire)

295

297

(Canadian DX-G with manualtransmission)

Optional

Wheel and Tire Specifications

Tires

260

15 x 6 J

16 x 6 1/2 J

17 x 7 J

P195/65R15 89H

P205/55R16 89H

P215/45R17 87V

215/45ZR17 91W

P195/65R15 89S

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

０７／１０／２６　１４：１５：５４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２６５　

＋Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

If your vehicle is equipped withsummer tires, be aware that thesetires are not designed for winterdriving conditions. For moreinformation, consult your dealer.

CONTINUED

Si model only

Winter Driving Snow Tires

Tire ChainsSummer Tires

Tires

Maintenance

261

CH2311T

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

０７／１０／２６　１４：１６：０８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２６６　

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfurther corrosion.

Checking the Battery

Tires, Checking the Battery

262

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

Except Si Si

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

０７／１０／２６　１４：１６：１６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２６７　

－

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio, youmay see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the preset buttons toenter the code (see page ).

The navigation system will alsodisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter a PINbefore it can be used. Refer to thenavigation system manual.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds. 173

On vehicles with navigation system

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery

Maintenance

263

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

０７／１０／２６　１４：１６：２４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２６８　

Fill the fuel tank.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if

the vehicle is being storedindoors).

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

Disconnect the battery.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fan cycles twice).Preferably, do this once a month.Wash and dry the exterior

completely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in reverse(manual) or Park (automatic).

Vehicle Storage

264

０７／１０／２６　１４：１６：３６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２６９　

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 266....................Changing a Flat Tire . 267

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 271................................Jump Starting . 273

..............If the Engine Overheats . 275.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 277..........Charging System Indicator . 277

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 278...............Brake System Indicator . 279

..............................................Fuses . 280..............................Fuse Locations . 284

......................Emergency Towing . 286

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

265

０７／０７／０３　２１：１７：５８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２７０　

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Follow these precautions:

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater cautionwhile driving.

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

Do not mount tire chains on thecompact spare tire.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Do not use a compact spare tiremounted on a front wheel; it willdamage the limited slip differential(see page ).

On vehicles with the TPMSsystem, the low tire pressureindicator comes on and stays onafter you replace the flat tire withthe compact spare tire. Afterseveral miles (kilometers) drivingwith the compact spare tire, theTPMS indicator comes on and thelow tire pressure indicator goes off.

267

On Si model

Compact Spare Tire

266

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０７／０７／０３　２１：１８：０７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２７１　

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or reverse (manual). Apply theparking brake.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by lifting up on the back edge.

Take the tool case out of the sparetire.

Unscrew the wing bolt, and takethe spare tire out of its well.

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

The compact spare tire is smallerthan a standard tire, and it will affectthe vehicle’s handling. Drivecautiously when the spare ismounted on your vehicle.

The size difference may also causedamage to the differential, so do notmount the compact spare on thefront. If either front tire goes flat,remove the rear tire on that sameside, mount the compact spare tireon the rear, then mount the rear tireon the front.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

On Si model only

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

267

SPARE TIRETRUNK FLOOR

JACK TOOL CASE

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

０７／０７／０３　２１：１８：１７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２７２　

Place the jack under the jackingpoint. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.Remove the center cap from the

wheel with the extension.

6. 7.Canadian DX-G model


268

JACKING POINTS

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

０７／０７／０３　２１：１８：２３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２７３　

CONTINUED

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriver orother tool. The wheel cover cannotbe removed without first removingthe wheel nuts.

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

10.8.

9.

DX and U.S. LX models:


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

269

WHEEL NUTS WHEEL COVER BRAKE HUB

WHEELNUTS

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

EXTENSION

０７／０７／０３　２１：１８：３１　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２７４　

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

11.

12.



270

WING BOLT

For sparetire

For normaltire

SPACERCONE

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

０７／０７／０３　２１：１８：３９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２７５　

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Store the jack and tools in the toolcase. Place the tool case in thecenter of the flat tire.

Store the wheel cover or centercap in the trunk. Make sure it doesnot get scratched or damaged.

Lower the trunk floor, and closethe trunk lid.

Your vehicle’s original tire has atire pressure monitoring systemsensor. To replace a tire, refer to

(seepage ).

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

18.

19.

20.

21.

214273

On U.S. models

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump StartingChanging a Tire with TPMS

If the Engine Won’t StartTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

271

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

０７／０７／０３　２１：１８：５２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２７６　

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).Are you using a properly coded

key? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. See

on page .

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the vehiclefrom a booster battery (see page

).

286

273

77

198

280

286

262

If the Engine Won’t Start

EmergencyTowing

Starting theEngine

The Starter Operates Normally

Emergency Towing

272

０７／１０／２６　１４：１６：４６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２７７　

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

You cannot start your vehicle with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

To jump start your vehicle:

The numbers in the illustrationsshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

Turn off all the electricalaccessories: heater, A/C, audiosystem, lights, etc. Put thetransmission in neutral (manual)or Park (automatic), and set theparking brake.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Jump Starting

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

273

BOOSTER BATTERY

Except Si

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

０７／０７／０３　２１：１９：０９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２７８　

－＋

＋

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

6.4.

5.

3.

Jump Starting

274

BOOSTER BATTERY

Si Except Si Si

０７／０７／０３　２１：１９：１７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２７９　

CONTINUED

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

If the vehicle overheats, youshould take immediate action. Theonly indication may be thetemperature gauge climbing to orabove the red mark. Or you maysee steam or spray coming fromunder the hood.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutral(M/T) or Park (A/T), and set theparking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning indicators.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

The reading of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

7.

1.

2.

Jump Starting, If the Engine Overheats

If the Engine OverheatsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

275

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugereading at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

０７／０７／０３　２１：１９：２４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２８０　

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

). Add coolant if the level isbelow the MIN mark.

Start the engine, and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum heat. Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the readingreaches the middle of thetemperature gauge or lowerbefore checking the radiator.

7.

8.

9.3.

4.

5.

6.

10.

11.286

185

286Emergency

TowingEmergency

Towing

If the Engine Overheats

276

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０７／０７／０３　２１：１９：３３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２８１　

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.This indicator should never come on

when the engine is running. If itstarts flashing or stays on, the oilpressure has dropped very low orlost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

If the charging system indicatorcomes on brightly when the engineis running, the battery is not beingcharged.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

1.

2.

3.

4.

183

232

286Emergency Towing

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

277

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

０７／０７／０３　２１：１９：４２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２８２　

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have your vehiclechecked by the dealer as soon aspossible.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If your vehicle’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It can take severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. You will also see a‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message onthe information display. Tighten thecap until it clicks at least once.Tightening the cap will not turn theindicator off immediately; it can takeseveral days of normal driving.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for an emissionstest until the readiness codes are set.Refer to formore information (see page ).303

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Readiness CodesEmissions Testing

278

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

０７／０７／０３　２１：１９：４９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２８３　

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator comes on withthe brake system indicator, haveyour vehicle inspected by yourdealer immediately.The brake system indicator normally

comes on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position and asa reminder to check the parkingbrake. It will stay on if you do notfully release the parking brake.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

286

242Emergency

Towing

Brake System Indicator

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

279

CanadaU.S.

０７／０７／０３　２１：１９：５６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２８４　

The under-hood fuse box is on thedriver’s side, next to the brake fluidreservoir. To open it, push the tabsas shown.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that device. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isthe cause. Replace any blown fuses,and check if the device works.

The fuses are in two fuse boxes. Theinterior fuse box is underneath thesteering column.

284 285

Fuses

Checking and Replacing Fuses

280

INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD

TAB

FUSE LABEL

０７／０７／０３　２１：２０：０３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２８５　

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided on the back of theunder-hood fuse box cover.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-head screw-driver.

1.

2.

3. 4.

CONTINUED

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

281

FUSE PULLER

BLOWNFUSE BLOWN

０７／０７／０３　２１：２０：１０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２８６　

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.Look for a blown wire inside the

fuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified technician.

6.

5.

Fuses

282

BLOWN

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

０７／０７／０３　２１：２０：１６　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２８７　

If the driver’s power window fuse isremoved, the AUTO function of thedriver’s window will be disabled. Youshould reset the AUTO feature, (seepage ).

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ENTER CODE’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the digit code (seepage ).

When the audio system is disabled,the clock setting in the audio systemwill be canceled. You will need toreset the clock (see page ).

100

174

173

All models except DX and CanadianDX-G

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

283

０７／０７／０３　２１：２０：２０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２８８　

＊

＊

＊

－

－－

－

＊＊

No.

No. Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected

Amps.

Amps.

4

567

89

1011121314151617181920212223

1

2

3

Main FuseEPSOption MainIgnition Switch MainABS/VSA MotorABS/VSA F/S

Headlight MainPower Window MainNot UsedSub Fan MotorMain Fan Motor (M/T)Main Fan Motor (A/T)Rear DefoggerBlowerHazardFI SubStop and HornNot UsedNot UsedIGPS Oil LevelNot UsedAudio AmpIG CoilFI MainMG ClutchDBWInterior LightBack Up

100 A(70 A)60 A50 A30 A30 A40 A

50 A40 A

20 A20 A30 A30 A40 A10 A15 A15 A

7.5 A

(15 A)15 A15 A

7.5 A15 A

7.5 A10 A

1 :2 :

If equippedOn models with VSA system

1

1

2

Fuse Locations

284

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

０７／０７／０３　２１：２０：２７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２８９　

＊

＊

＊

＊

－

－

－

－－

－

－

－

＊

No. No.

No.

Circuits ProtectedCircuits ProtectedAmps. Amps.

Amps. Circuits Protected

:

12345678

910111213141516

17181920212223242526272829303132333435363738

ODSMETERSRSRight Headlight HighLeft Headlight HighSmall (Interior)Small (Exterior)Right Headlight Low

Power WindowFuel PumpAlternatorABS/VSAHeated SeatNot UsedTPMSNot Used

7.5 A15 A10 A7.5 A(15 A)

(7.5 A)

7.5 A7.5 A10 A10 A10 A

7.5 A7.5 A10 A

10 A20 A15 A

20 A

(20 A)20 A20 A

(15 A)15 A20 A

20 A20 A

7.5 A10 A

7.5 A30 A

Left Headlight LowHeadlight High MainSmall (Main)Not UsedHeadlight Low MainNot UsedNot UsedMoonroofDoor LockDriver’s Power WindowNot UsedRear ACC SocketACCPassenger’s Power WindowNot UsedRight Rear Power WindowLeft Rear Power WindowNot UsedACC RadioHACDaytime Running LightFront Wiper

If equipped

Fuse Locations

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

285

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

０７／０７／０３　２１：２０：３５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２９０　

－

－

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

There are two ways to tow yourvehicle:

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do this:

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to neutral.Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the front tires and lift them offthe ground. The rear tires remain onthe ground.

With the front wheels on the ground,do not tow the vehicle more than 50miles (80 km), and keep the speedbelow 35 mph (55 km/h).

Start the engine.Press on the brake pedal. Movethe shift lever through all itspositions.

Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

Release the parking brake.Turn off the engine.

Shift to D position for 5 seconds,then to N.

Manual transmission:

Automatic transmission:

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This is the best way totransport your vehicle.

This is an acceptableway to tow your vehicle.

Emergency Towing

286

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourvehicle must be transported with thef ront wheels of f the ground.

０７／０７／０３　２１：２０：４７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２９１　

Do not tie down the vehicle at anangle that would allow the towingcables to contact the vehicle’s frontbumper. To avoid possible damage,protect the front bumper with tape.

If your vehicle is equipped with afront spoiler, remove it beforetowing so it is not damaged.

Emergency Towing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

287

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

０７／０７／０３　２１：２０：５２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２９２　

288

０７／０７／０３　２１：２０：５５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２９３　

－

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 290................................Specifications . 292

DOT Tire Quality Grading......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 295

.................................Treadwear . 295......................................Traction . 295

.............................Temperature . 296.................................Tire Labeling . 297

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Required

.............Federal Explanation . 298

.......................Emissions Controls . 300.....................The Clean Air Act . 300

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 300

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 300

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 300

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 301....................PGM-FI System . 301

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 301

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 301

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 301

....................Replacement Parts . 301..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 302

........................Emissions Testing . 303

Technical Information

TechnicalInform

ation

289

０７／０７／０３　２１：２０：５８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２９４　

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

The VIN is also located on theengine bulkhead. Slide the cover onthe engine compartment bulkhead toview the VIN. Always close the coverwhen finished.

Identif ication Numbers

290

CERTIFICATION LABEL

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

COVER

０７／０７／０３　２１：２１：０３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２９５　

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Identif ication Numbers

TechnicalInform

ation

291

MANUAL TRANSMISSIONNUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC/MANUALTRANSMISSION NUMBER

Except Si

Si

０７／０７／０３　２１：２１：０９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２９６　

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

Specifications

292

Dimensions

Weights

Engine

Seating Capacities

176.7 in (4,489 mm)69.0 in (1,752 mm)56.5 in (1,435 mm)106.3 in (2,700 mm)59.0 in (1,499 mm)59.9 in (1,522 mm)

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Type

Bore x Stroke

Displacement

Compression ratio

Spark plugs

Spark plugs

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC VTEC , DOHC i-VTEC

4-cylinder gasoline engine3.19 x 3.44 in (81.0 x 87.3 mm)

3.39 x 3.39 in (86 x 86 mm)110 cu-in (1,799 cm )122 cu-in (1,998 cm )

10.511.0IZFR6K11SNGK:

DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11SIFR7G11KSSK22PR-M11STotal

FrontRear

523

FrontRear

NGK:DENSO:

1 :2 :

Except SiSi

1

2

1 2

1

2

1

2

2

1

０７／１０／２６　１４：２３：５９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２９７　

－－

－－－

－－－－－－－－－－

＊

＊＊＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

TechnicalInform

ation

293

Air Conditioning

Lights

Capacities

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant oil type

HFC-134a (R-134a)14.1 15.9 oz (400 450 g)

SP-10

Headlights

Front turn signal/side marker/Parking lightsRear turn signal lightsStop/TaillightsRear side marker lightsBack-up lightsTaillightsHigh-mount brake lightLicense plate lightsCeiling lightSpotlightsTrunk light

12 V 60 W (HB3)12 V 51 W (HB4)12 V 21/5 W

12 V 21 W12 V 21/5 W12 V 2 CP12 V 21 W12 V 3 CP12 V 21 W12 V 5 W12 V 8 W12 V 8 W12 V 5 W

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

1.8 US qt (1.7 )

1.6 US qt (1.5 )

1.19 US gal (4.5 )

1.80 US gal (6.8 )

4.6 US qt (4.4 )

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

5.8 US qt (5.5 )

6.2 US qt (5.9 )2.5 US qt (2.4 )

1.40 US gal (5.3 )

1.77 US gal (6.7 )

2.6 US qt (2.5 )

1.7 US qt (1.6 )

1.5 US qt (1.4 )

1.37 US gal (5.2 )

1.72 US gal (6.5 )

3.9 US qt (3.7 )

3.7 US qt (3.5 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

13.2 US gal (50 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity: 0.11 US gal (0.4 )Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

Fuel tankEnginecoolant

Engine oil

Manualtransmissionfluid

AutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

HighLow

A/TM/T

A/TM/T

Change

Total

U.S. VehiclesCanadaVehicles

Approx.

1 :

2 :3 :4 :

Except SiSi

ChangeIncluding filter

Without filter

Total

Change

Total

ChangeTotal

1 3

3

4

3

3

4

3

4

3

4

3

4

3

4

3

4

2

3

０７／１０／２６　１４：２４：２３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２９８　

－

－－－－－－

＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

294

Fuses

Alignment

Battery Tires

P195/65R15 89H

Interior

Under-hood

Toe-in

Camber

Caster 7°24’0°45’0°

0.08 in (2.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

See page 284 or the fuse boxcover.

See page 285 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the steeringcolumn.

Capacity 12 V12 V12 V

36 AH/5 HR

38 AH/5 HR45 AH/20 HR

47 AH/20 HR

12 V12 V 38 AH/5 HR

47 AH/20 HR

12 V

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

Size

Pressure

T135/80R16 101MT125/70D15 95M215/45ZR17 91WP215/45R17 87VP205/55R16 89H

T125/70D16 96M

P195/65R15 89S

FrontRearFrontRearFront

Front/Rear

Spare

LX, EX, EX-LSi (all season tires)Except Si

SiOptional for Si (summer tires)

U.S.Vehicles

CanadaVehicles

1 :2 :3 :4 :5 :6 :7 :8 :

DX, Canadian DX-G with automatic transmissionCanadian DX-G with manual transmission

Si without VSA system

Front/Rear

Spare

3

1

2

4

5

7

7

3

4, 6

6

7

8

1, 2

０７／１０／２６　１４：２４：４２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０２９９　

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

TechnicalInform

ation

295

０７／０７／０３　２１：２２：１０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３００　

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Temperature

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

296

０７／０７／０３　２１：２２：１４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３０１　

－

－

－－

－

－－

－

－－

－

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following example.TIN is located on the sidewall of thetire.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.Manufacturer’sidentification mark.Tire type code.Date of manufacture.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Below is an example oftire size with an explanation of whateach component means.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).Tire width in millimeters.Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).Rim diameter in inches.Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

YearWeek

P

55

R

16

DOT

B97R

FW6X2202

205

89

H

CONTINUED

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN)Tire Size

Tire Labeling

TechnicalInform

ation

297

TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

(1)(2)(3)(4)

Tire Size

Maximum Tire Load

Tire Identification Number (TIN)Maximum Tire Pressure

(3)

(1)

(1)

(2)(4)

DOT B97R FW6X 2202P205/55R16 89H

０７／０７／０３　２１：２２：３０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３０２　

－

－

－

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.

(If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.

Max Press

Max Load

U.S. models only

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

Tire Labeling, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

298

０７／０７／０３　２１：２２：３９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３０３　

－

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicatorto indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

TechnicalInform

ation

299

０７／０７／０３　２１：２２：４５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３０４　

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Emissions Controls

300

０７／０７／０３　２１：２２：５３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３０５　

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcome out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection. It has threesubsystems: air intake, enginecontrol, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM) inautomatic transmission vehicles orthe engine control module (ECM) inmanual transmission vehicles usesvarious sensors to determine howmuch air is going into the engine. It

then controls how much fuel to injectunder all operating conditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls

TechnicalInform

ation

301

０７／０７／０３　２１：２３：０３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３０６　

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperature

for the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

302

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

Si modelDX, Canadian DX-G, LX, EX, EX-L

０７／０７／０３　２１：２３：１０　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３０７　

If you take your vehicle for anemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orneutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal and let the engine idle for 20seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

CONTINUED

Testing of Readiness Codes

Emissions Testing

TechnicalInform

ation

303

０７／０７／０３　２１：２３：１９　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３０８　

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (automatic) or 5th (manual). Donot use the cruise control. Whentraffic allows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

7. 8.

9.

Emissions Testing

304

０７／０７／０３　２１：２３：２４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３０９　

....Customer Service Information . 306....................Warranty Coverages . 307

Reporting Safety Defects..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 308

.....................Authorized Manuals . 309

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

305

０７／０７／０３　２１：２３：２７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３１０　

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Service Office.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

290

Customer Service Information

306

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

Customer Relations

０７／０７／０３　２１：２３：３５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３１１　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

this warranty gives upto 100 % credit toward a replacementbattery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty.Please read your warranty bookletfor details.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2008 Honda warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2008 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

307

０７／０７／０３　２１：２３：４５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３１２　

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 NewJersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from .

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

308

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

０７／０８／０６　１２：５７：１３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３１３　

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order by phone or online:

Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures forrepair to engine and chassis components. It is writtenfor the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enoughfor most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depthtroubleshooting information for each electrical circuitin your vehicle.

Describes the procedures involved in the replacementof damaged body parts.

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

(U.S. only)

Authorized Manuals

Authorized

Manuals

309

Form Description

2006-2008 Honda Civic 2/4 Door

Service Manual

2006-2008 Honda Civic 2/4 Door

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2006 Model Series Honda Civic 2/4 Door

Body Repair Manual

2008 Honda Civic 4 Door Owner’s Manual

2008 Honda Civic

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

2008 Honda Civic Honda Service History

2008 Honda Civic 4 Door Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61SNA05

61SNA05EL

61SNA30

31SNA621

31SNA810

31SNAM20

31SNAQ20

HON-R

www. helminc. com

０７／１０／２６　１４：２７：１７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３１４　

310

０７／０７／０３　２１：２４：００　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３１５　

CONTINUED

...Accessories and Modifications . 189ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 78.............Accessory Power Socket . 106

..................Active Head Restraints . 94....................Additives, Engine Oil . 233

...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 21...Airbags, Additional Information . 21...Additional Safety Precautions . 32

..........Advanced Airbag System . 26.............................Airbag Service . 31

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 30

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 30

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 29How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 24...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27

How Your Side Curtain Airbags.........................................Work . 29

........................SRS Components . 21..............Air Conditioning System . 108

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 255

......................................Antifreeze . 236Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 60, 208...................................Operation . 208

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 173Anti-theft Steering Column

..............................................Lock . 78............................................Armrest . 95

................................Audio System . 112.....Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 81

.........................Auto Door Locking . 81.....................Auto Door Unlocking . 83

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 19.............Automatic Speed Control . 176..............Automatic Transmission . 202

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 293...............Checking Fluid Level . 240

.......................................Shifting . 202Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 202................Shift Lever Positions . 203

....................Shift Lock Release . 205......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 172

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 65, 277............................Jump Starting . 273

..............................Maintenance . 262............................Specifications . 294

..............................Before Driving . 179....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 18

.........................Beverage Holders . 106Brakes

...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 208.............Break-in, New Linings . 180

....................Bulb Replacement . 247...........................................Fluid . 242

.................Pad Wear Indicators . 207.......................................Parking . 103

.................System Indicator . 59, 279.............................Braking System . 207

.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 180..Brightness Control, Instruments . 73

........................Brights, Headlights . 72

Index

A BIN

DE

X

I

０７／１０／２６　１４：２４：４８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３１６　

＊

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 247

..............................Brake Lights . 247........Front Side Marker Lights . 246.........Front Turn Signal Lights . 246

.........................Headlights . 244, 245.........High-mount Brake Light . 249

..........................Parking Lights . 246.........Rear Side Marker Lights . 247..........Rear Turn Signal Lights . 247

............................Specifications . 293..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 244

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii...................................Dashboard . 3, 56

................Daytime Running Lights . 73.........Defects, Reporting Safety . 308

........................Defog and Defrost . 111................Defogger, Rear Window . 74..............Defrosting the Windows . 111

....................................Dimensions . 292...............Dimming the Headlights . 72

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 240

..................................Engine Oil . 183..........................Directional Signals . 72

Disc Brake Pad Wear...................................Indicators . 207

............................Disc Player . 124, 144..................Display Change Button . 66

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 236

.........................................Card, PC . 153............................Capacities Chart . 293

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 51.............................Carrying Cargo . 191

.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii..............................CD Player . 124, 144

..................................Ceiling Light . 104........................Certification Label . 290

............................................Chains . 261....................Changing a Flat Tire . 267

Changing Oil........................................How to . 234......................................When to . 223

...Charging System Indicator . 65, 277..............Check Fuel Cap Message . 68............Checklist, Before Driving . 197

.....................................Child Safety . 33Child Seats

.............LATCH Anchor System . 42...........................Lower Anchors . 42

................Tether Anchor Points . 45..................Childproof Door Locks . 80

.........................Clock, Setting the . 174...................................Clutch Fluid . 243

........................CO in the Exhaust . 300............Cold Weather, Starting in . 198

..............................Compact Spare . 266.................Console Compartment . 106.................Consumer Information . 306

.............Controls, Instruments and . 55Coolant

........................................Adding . 236....................................Checking . 185

.........................Proper Solution . 236...................Temperature Gauge . 67

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 300

............Cruise Control Operation . 176....Customer Service Information . 306

Index

C

D

II

０７／１０／２６　１４：２４：５４　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３１７　

＊

CONTINUED

Doors.Auto Door Locking/Unlocking . 81

.....................Auto Door Locking . 81.................Auto Door Unlocking . 83

..............Locking and Unlocking . 79......................Power Door Locks . 80

........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 295Downshifting, Manual

.............................Transmission . 199...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 195....................................Economy . 186..................................Guidelines . 196

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 250

..............................Economy, Fuel . 186............Emergencies on the Road . 265.............Battery, Jump Starting . 273...........Brake System Indicator . 279

................Changing a Flat Tire . 267.....Charging System Indicator . 277

..................Checking the Fuses . 280.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 277...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 278

..................Overheated Engine . 275.........................Emergency Brake . 103

......................Emergency Flashers . 74......................Emergency Towing . 286

............Emergency Trunk Opener . 87.......................Emissions Controls . 300........................Emissions Testing . 303

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 67

......Engine Speed Limiter . 201, 204Malfunction Indicator

......................................Lamp . 278........Oil Pressure Indicator . 65, 277..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 232

...............................Overheating . 275............................Specifications . 292

.......................................Starting . 198......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 181

.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 300...............................Exhaust Fumes . 51

Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat........................................Belts by . 16

...................................Fan, Interior . 108

.........................................Features . 107....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 181

Filters.........................Dust and Pollen . 250

...............................................Oil . 2345-speed Manual Transmission

...............Checking Fluid Level . 241................................Shifting the . 199

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 74...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 267

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 240

..........................................Brake . 242.........................................Clutch . 243

...................................Locations . 230..............Manual Transmission . 241

..........................Power Steering . 243..................Windshield Washer . 239

FM Stereo Radio...................................Reception . 166

...........................Folding Rear Seat . 95..........................Four-way Flashers . 74

..............................Front Airbags . 9, 24

Index

F

E

IND

EX

III

０７／０７／０３　２１：２４：１５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３１８　

.................................................Fuel . 180......................Fill Door and Cap . 181

...........................................Gauge . 67................Octane Requirement . 180

...............................Oxygenated . 181........................Reserve Indicator . 64

........................Tank, Filling the . 181.....................Fuses, Checking the . 280

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 268.......................................Jack, Tire . 267

................................Jump Starting . 273

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 186.........................................Gasoline . 180

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 64...........................................Gauge . 67

................Octane Requirement . 180........................Tank, Filling the . 181

................Gas Station Procedures . 181Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 67...............................................Fuel . 67

Gearshift Lever Positions..........Automatic Transmission . 202

..............Manual Transmission . 199......................................Glove Box . 106

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 244..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 74

Headlights........................................Aiming . 244

............Daytime Running Lights . 73..................High Beam Indicator . 61

........................Reminder Beeper . 72........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 244

...................................Turning on . 72..............................Head Restraints . 92

.............................Heated Mirrors . 103.....................Heating and Cooling . 108

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 198.................High-Low Beam Switch . 72..............High-mount Brake Light . 249

.......................Hood, Opening the . 182..............................................Horn . 4, 70

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 290Ignition

..............................................Keys . 76...........................................Switch . 78

............Timing Control System . 301.........Important Safety Precautions . 6

.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 59...............................Infant Restraint . 38

Infant Seats.............LATCH Anchor System . 42

...........................Lower Anchors . 42................Tether Anchor Points . 45

Inflation, Recommended Tire...................................Pressures . 255

........................Information Display . 66.................................Inside Mirror . 102

.............................Inspection, Tire . 256............................Instrument Panel . 57

................Instrument Panel Lights . 59........Instrument Panel Brightness . 73

..............Instruments and Controls . 55...............................Interior Lights . 104

........................................Introduction . i

Index

H

I

G

J

IV

０７／０７／０３　２１：２４：２２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３１９　

＊

CONTINUED

..................................................Keys . 76

.......................Label, Certification . 290.................Lane Change, Signaling . 72

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 14, 19.................LATCH Anchor System . 42

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 244

.......................................Indicator . 59.........................................Parking . 72

..................................Turn Signal . 72....................................Load Limits . 192

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 78Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 78............................Fuel Fill Door . 181

.................................Power Door . 80...........................................Trunk . 86

........................Low Coolant Level . 185.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 64

................................Lower Anchors . 42...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 199

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 65, 277Low Tire Pressure

.............................Indicator . 63, 212...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 293

...................Neutral Gear Position . 203..................New Vehicle Break-in . 180

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 200

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 290

..................................Maintenance . 221................................Minder . 223-229

.........................Minder Indicator . 65...Owner Maintenance Checks . 228

..........................................Safety . 222.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 278

...................Manual Transmission . 199........Manual Transmission Fluid . 241

...............................Meters, Gauges . 66...................Methanol in Gasoline . 181

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 102.......................................Moonroof . 100

...........................MP3/WMA . 125, 145

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 180.........................................Odometer . 66

...............................Odometer, Trip . 67Oil

........................Change, How to . 234......................Change, When to . 223......................Checking Engine . 183..............Pressure Indicator . 65, 277

.......Selecting Proper Viscosity . 232...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 78

Onboard Refueling Vapor....................................Recovery . 300

............................Outside Mirrors . 102....Outside Temperature Indicator . 68

....................Overheating, Engine . 275....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 228

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 181

Index

M

N

O

K

L

IND

EX

V

０７／１０／２６　１４：２５：０２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３２０　

＊..................................Safety Belts . 8, 18

.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 308.................................Safety Features . 7

...........................................Airbags . 9.......................................Seat Belts . 8

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 52..............................Safety Messages . iii

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 18...............Additional Information . 18

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 19

................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14, 19........................Maintenance . 20, 250

Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 18, 59

..............Panel Brightness Control . 73........................Park Gear Position . 203

...........................................Parking . 206...............................Parking Brake . 103

Parking Brake and Brake.................System Indicator . 59, 279

.................................Parking Lights . 72..Parking Over Things that Burn . 302

........................Playing a Disc . 124, 144.........................Playing a PC Card . 153

..................Playing the Radio . 115, 132.............................PGM-FI System . 301

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 16

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11...Additional Safety Precautions . 17

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 16........................Protecting Children . 33

.....................General Guidelines . 33...........................Protecting Infants . 38

...........Protecting Larger Children . 47.............Protecting Small Children . 39

...................Radiator Overheating . 275.............Radio/CD Sound System . 114

Radio/CD/PC Card Sound........................................System . 132

...........................Readiness Codes . 278Rear Lights, Bulb

.......................Replacement . 247-249..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 95

..........................Rear View Mirror . 102.................Rear Window Defogger . 74...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 91

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 200.............................Reminder Lights . 59

................Remote Audio Controls . 171.......................Remote Transmitter . 88

Replacement Information..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 250

................Engine Oil and Filter . 234..........................................Fuses . 280

................................Light Bulbs . 244................Maintenance Minder . 223

...........................................Tires . 259.............................Wiper Blades . 251

Replacing Seat Belts After a............................................Crash . 20

Reserve Tank, Engine...............................Coolant . 185, 236

...............................Restraint, Child . 33..................Reverse Gear Position . 203

................................Rotation, Tire . 258

Index

R

S

P

VI

０７／１０／２６　１４：２５：０７　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３２１　

＊

CONTINUED

Taillights, Changing..................................Bulbs . 247, 248

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 265

Seat Belts...................System Components . 18

...............Use During Pregnancy . 16...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14

........................Seats, Adjusting the . 91............................Security System . 175

...............................Serial Number . 290...........................Service Intervals . 223...........................Service Manual . 309

.........Service Station Procedures . 181..........................Setting the Clock . 174

...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 202........................Shift Lock Release . 205

................................Side Airbags . 9, 27..........................Off Indicator . 30, 60

..................Side Curtain Airbags . 9, 29Side Marker Lights, Bulb

......................Replacement . 246, 247...............................Signaling Turns . 72

.....................................Snow Tires . 261................................Sound System . 112

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 266

............................Specifications . 294....................Specifications Charts . 292

................................Speed Control . 176

Speed-sensitive Volume.......Compensation (SVC) . 118, 142

.......................................Spotlights . 104..........SRS, Additional Information . 21

...Additional Safety Precautions . 32..........Advanced Airbag System . 26

.............................Airbag Service . 31How the Passenger Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 30How the Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 30How the SRS Indicator

.......................................Works . 29How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 24...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27

How Your Side Curtain Airbags.........................................Work . 29

........................SRS Components . 21.............................SRS Indicator . 29, 60

....START (Ignition Key Position) . 78.......................Starting the Engine . 198

In Cold Weather at High..................................Altitude . 198

................With a Dead Battery . 273........Steam Coming from Engine . 275

Steering Wheel..................................Adjustment . 75

.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 78...................Stereo Sound System . 112....................Storing Your Vehicle . 264

Supplemental Restraint..................................System . 9, 21......................................Servicing . 31

.........................SRS Indicator . 29, 60...................System Components . 21

.........................................SVC . 118, 142..................................Synthetic Oil . 233

Index

T

IND

EX

VII

０７／１０／２６　１４：２５：１３　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３２２　

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 265

..Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 295........................Unleaded Gasoline . 180

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 236

Technical Descriptions....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 295.....Emissions Control Systems . 300

....................Emissions Testing . 303.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 181

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 301

.................................Tire Labeling . 297.......................Temperature Gauge . 67.....................Tether Anchor Points . 45

............................Theft Protection . 175..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 302

..........................Time, Setting the . 174....................................Tire Chains . 261

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 267.........................Tire Information . 295

Tire Pressure Monitoring System................................(TPMS) . 212

.............................Indicator . 63, 213Required Federal

..........................Explanation . 298...............................................Tires . 254

..............................Air Pressure . 255.........................Checking Wear . 256..........................Compact Spare . 266

....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 295

..................High Speed Driving . 256......................................Inflation . 254

..................................Inspection . 256..............................Maintenance . 258

...................................Replacing . 259......................................Rotating . 258

................................Service Life . 257...........................................Snow . 261

....................Specifications . 260, 294................................Tire Chains . 261

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 267Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 215..................Emergency Towing . 286

...........................Traction Devices . 261Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,..............................Automatic . 240

Checking Fluid Level,...................................Manual . 241

..................Fluid Selection . 240, 241..............Identification Number . 290.............Shifting the Automatic . 202

..................Shifting the Manual . 199...................................Treadwear . 295

.......................................Trip Meter . 67

................................................Trunk . 86........................................Opening . 86

...................Open Monitor Light . 61....................................Turn Signals . 72

................................Vanity Mirror . 105.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 192

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 292....Vehicle Identification Number . 290

.............................Vehicle Storage . 264.................................................VIN . 290

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 233

Index

U

V

VIII

０７／１０／２６　１４：２５：１８　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３２３　

＊

Vehicle Stability Assist........................(VSA) System . 210

............Activation Indicator . 62, 210..................................Off Switch . 211

.................System Indicator . 62, 210

............WARNING, Explanation of . iii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 52

....................Warranty Coverages . 307Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 239.......................................Indicator . 64.....................................Operation . 71

.............................................Wheel . 253...............Adjusting the Steering . 75............Alignment and Balance . 258

..........................Compact Spare . 266...............................Nut Wrench . 268

Windows..................Operating the Power . 99

...........................Rear, Defogger . 74Windshield

.......................................Cleaning . 71...................................Defroster . 111

.......................................Washers . 71Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 251.....................................Operation . 71

............................Worn Tires . 256, 257.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 286

:U.S. only

Index

IND

EX

W

IX

０７／１０／２６　１４：２５：２２　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３２４　

Service Information Summary

Automatic Transmission Fluid: Brake Fluid:Gasoline:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Recommended Engine Oil:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Manual Transmission Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) (see page

).

Front/Rear:

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

Premium unleaded gasoline,pump octane number of 91 orhigher.

4.6 US qt (4.4 )

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

API Premium grade 5W-30detergent oil (see page ).

3.9 US qt (3.7 )

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

13.2 US gal (50 )

33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )

Spare Tire:60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Capacity (including differential):

1.5 US qt (1.4 )

1.6 US qt (1.5 )

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

DX, Canadian DX-G

Except Si

Si

Except Si

Si

233

233

Except Si

Si

242

LX, EX, EX-L

Si

240

241

All models except Si andCanadian DX-G (M/T)

243

０７／１０／２６　１４：２５：４５　３１ＳＮＡ６２０　０３２５　

owner’s manual (unlinked) - american honda · pdf file2008 civic sedan owner’s...

Documents